TextSweep

<plist version="1.0">
<dict>
	<key>CFBundleDevelopmentRegion</key>
	<string>English</string>
	<key>CFBundleExecutable</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleGetInfoString</key>
	<string>TextSweep 4.2.0 (c) 2018 WordTech Communications LLC</string>
        <key>NSPrincipalClass</key>
        <string>NSApplication</string>
<key>NSHighResolutionCapable</key>
	<true/>
	<key>NSAppleScriptEnabled</key>
	<true/>
	<key>OSAScriptingDefinition</key>
	<string>TextSweep.sdef</string>
	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersionByArchitecture</key>
	<dict>
	<key>i386</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	<key>x86_64</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	</dict>
	<key>LSArchitecturePriority</key>
<array>
<string>x86_64</string>
<string>i386</string>
</array>
	<key>LSApplicationCategoryType</key>
................................................................................
	<key>CFBundleDisplayName</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleIdentifier</key>
	<string>com.codebykevin.com.textsweep-cbk</string>
	<key>CFBundlePackageType</key>
	<string>APPL</string>
	<key>CFBundleShortVersionString</key>
	<string>4.2.0</string>
	<key>CFBundleVersion</key>
	<string>4.2.0</string>
	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersion</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	<key>LSRequiresCarbon</key>
	<true/>	
	<key>NSSupportsAutomaticTermination</key>
	<string>YES</string>
	<key>NSSupportsSuddenTermination</key>
	<string>YES</string>
  <key>SUFeedURL</key>
	<string>http://www.codebykevin.com/textsweep.xml</string>
</dict>
</plist>

<plist version="1.0">
<dict>
	<key>CFBundleDevelopmentRegion</key>
	<string>English</string>
	<key>CFBundleExecutable</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleGetInfoString</key>
	<string>TextSweep 5.0.0 (c) 2019 WordTech Communications LLC</string>
        <key>NSPrincipalClass</key>
        <string>NSApplication</string>
<key>NSHighResolutionCapable</key>
	<true/>
	<key>NSAppleScriptEnabled</key>
	<true/>


	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersionByArchitecture</key>
	<dict>


	<key>x86_64</key>
	<string>10.15</string>
	</dict>
	<key>LSArchitecturePriority</key>
<array>
<string>x86_64</string>
<string>i386</string>
</array>
	<key>LSApplicationCategoryType</key>
................................................................................
	<key>CFBundleDisplayName</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleIdentifier</key>
	<string>com.codebykevin.com.textsweep-cbk</string>
	<key>CFBundlePackageType</key>
	<string>APPL</string>
	<key>CFBundleShortVersionString</key>
	<string>5.0.0</string>
	<key>CFBundleVersion</key>
	<string>5.0.0</string>
	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersion</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	<key>LSRequiresCarbon</key>
	<true/>	
	<key>NSSupportsAutomaticTermination</key>
	<string>YES</string>
	<key>NSSupportsSuddenTermination</key>
	<string>YES</string>
  <key>SUFeedURL</key>
	<string>http://www.codebykevin.com/textsweep.xml</string>
</dict>
</plist>

<plist version="1.0">
<dict>
	<key>CFBundleDevelopmentRegion</key>
	<string>English</string>
	<key>CFBundleExecutable</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleGetInfoString</key>
	<string>TextSweep $1 (c) 2018 WordTech Communications LLC</string>
        <key>NSPrincipalClass</key>
        <string>NSApplication</string>
<key>NSHighResolutionCapable</key>
	<true/>
	<key>NSAppleScriptEnabled</key>
	<true/>
	<key>OSAScriptingDefinition</key>
	<string>TextSweep.sdef</string>
	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersionByArchitecture</key>
	<dict>
	<key>i386</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	<key>x86_64</key>
	<string>10.13</string>
	</dict>
	<key>LSArchitecturePriority</key>
<array>
<string>x86_64</string>
<string>i386</string>
</array>
	<key>LSApplicationCategoryType</key>
................................................................................
for lib in maclibs/*
do
  echo "Copying $lib library..."
  cp -R -f $lib TextSweep.app/Contents/lib
done


cp -f TextSweep.sdef TextSweep.app/Contents/Resources/TextSweep.sdef

#make website build and appstore build
echo "Making website build..."
ditto --rsrc  --arch x86_64 TextSweep.app build/TextSweep.app
cp -f Info-cbk.plist build/TextSweep.app/Contents/Info.plist


find build/TextSweep.app -type f -name "*.dylib"  -exec codesign --verbose --signature-size 9400 -f -s "Developer ID Application: Kevin Walzer" {} \; 
................................................................................

hdiutil create  -srcfolder build -fs HFS+ -volname TextSweep TextSweep.dmg

codesign  --signature-size 9400 -f -s "Developer ID Application: Kevin Walzer" --verbose=2  TextSweep.dmg

echo "Uploading DMG..."

upload TextSweep.dmg updates

upload textsweep-changes.tcl

upload textsweep-version.tcl


cd ../

#create archive of entire source tree
tar cvfz TextSweep-$1.tgz TextSweep



echo "Done."

<plist version="1.0">
<dict>
	<key>CFBundleDevelopmentRegion</key>
	<string>English</string>
	<key>CFBundleExecutable</key>
	<string>TextSweep</string>
	<key>CFBundleGetInfoString</key>
	<string>TextSweep $1 (c) 2019 WordTech Communications LLC</string>
        <key>NSPrincipalClass</key>
        <string>NSApplication</string>
<key>NSHighResolutionCapable</key>
	<true/>
	<key>NSAppleScriptEnabled</key>
	<true/>


	<key>LSMinimumSystemVersionByArchitecture</key>
	<dict>


	<key>x86_64</key>
	<string>10.15</string>
	</dict>
	<key>LSArchitecturePriority</key>
<array>
<string>x86_64</string>
<string>i386</string>
</array>
	<key>LSApplicationCategoryType</key>
................................................................................
for lib in maclibs/*
do
  echo "Copying $lib library..."
  cp -R -f $lib TextSweep.app/Contents/lib
done




#make website build and appstore build
echo "Making website build..."
ditto --rsrc  --arch x86_64 TextSweep.app build/TextSweep.app
cp -f Info-cbk.plist build/TextSweep.app/Contents/Info.plist


find build/TextSweep.app -type f -name "*.dylib"  -exec codesign --verbose --signature-size 9400 -f -s "Developer ID Application: Kevin Walzer" {} \; 
................................................................................

hdiutil create  -srcfolder build -fs HFS+ -volname TextSweep TextSweep.dmg

codesign  --signature-size 9400 -f -s "Developer ID Application: Kevin Walzer" --verbose=2  TextSweep.dmg

echo "Uploading DMG..."

#upload TextSweep.dmg updates

#upload textsweep-changes.tcl

#upload textsweep-version.tcl


cd ../

#create archive of entire source tree
#tar cvfz TextSweep-$1.tgz TextSweep



echo "Done."

#
# Tcl package index file
#
package ifneeded aem 1.0 "
    package require Tk 8.5-
    if {\"AppKit\" ni \[winfo server .\]} {error {TkAqua Cocoa required}}
        load [list [file join $dir libaem1.0.dylib]] aem"

if {[package vsatisfies [package present Tcl] 8.5]} {
	package ifneeded tls 1.7.19 [list apply {{dir} {
		if {{shared} eq "static"} {
			load {} Tls
		} else {
			load [file join $dir tcltls.dylib] Tls
		}

		set tlsTclInitScript [file join $dir tls.tcl]
		if {[file exists $tlsTclInitScript]} {
			source $tlsTclInitScript
		}
	}} $dir]
} elseif {[package vsatisfies [package present Tcl] 8.4]} {
	package ifneeded tls 1.7.19 [list load [file join $dir tcltls.dylib] Tls]
}

package ifneeded tls 1.6.7     "[list source [file join $dir tls.tcl]] ;      [list tls::initlib $dir libtls1.6.7.dylib]"

#
# Copyright (C) 1997-2000 Matt Newman <matt@novadigm.com> 
#
# $Header: /cvsroot/tls/tls/tls.tcl,v 1.14 2015/07/07 17:16:03 andreas_kupries Exp $
#
namespace eval tls {
    variable logcmd tclLog
    variable debug 0
 
    # Default flags passed to tls::import
    variable defaults {}

    # Maps UID to Server Socket
    variable srvmap
    variable srvuid 0

    # Over-ride this if you are using a different socket command
    variable socketCmd
    if {![info exists socketCmd]} {
        set socketCmd [info command ::socket]
    }
}

proc tls::initlib {dir dll} {
    # Package index cd's into the package directory for loading.
    # Irrelevant to unixoids, but for Windows this enables the OS to find
    # the dependent DLL's in the CWD, where they may be.
    set cwd [pwd]
    catch {cd $dir}
    if {[string equal $::tcl_platform(platform) "windows"] &&
	![string equal [lindex [file system $dir] 0] "native"]} {
	# If it is a wrapped executable running on windows, the openssl
	# dlls must be copied out of the virtual filesystem to the disk
	# where Windows will find them when resolving the dependency in
	# the tls dll. We choose to make them siblings of the executable.
	package require starkit
	set dst [file nativename [file dirname $starkit::topdir]]
	foreach sdll [glob -nocomplain -directory $dir -tails *eay32.dll] {
	    catch {file delete -force            $dst/$sdll}
	    catch {file copy   -force $dir/$sdll $dst/$sdll}
	}
    }
    set res [catch {uplevel #0 [list load [file join [pwd] $dll]]} err]
    catch {cd $cwd}
    if {$res} {
	namespace eval [namespace parent] {namespace delete tls}
	return -code $res $err
    }
    rename tls::initlib {}
}

#
# Backwards compatibility, also used to set the default
# context options
#
proc tls::init {args} {
    variable defaults

    set defaults $args
}
#
# Helper function - behaves exactly as the native socket command.
#
proc tls::socket {args} {
    variable socketCmd
    variable defaults
    set idx [lsearch $args -server]
    if {$idx != -1} {
	set server 1
	set callback [lindex $args [expr {$idx+1}]]
	set args [lreplace $args $idx [expr {$idx+1}]]

	set usage "wrong # args: should be \"tls::socket -server command ?options? port\""
	set options "-cadir, -cafile, -certfile, -cipher, -command, -dhparams, -keyfile, -myaddr, -password, -request, -require, -servername, -ssl2, -ssl3, -tls1, -tls1.1 or -tls1.2"
    } else {
	set server 0

	set usage "wrong # args: should be \"tls::socket ?options? host port\""
	set options "-async, -cadir, -cafile, -certfile, -cipher, -command, -dhparams, -keyfile, -myaddr, -myport, -password, -request, -require, -servername, -ssl2, -ssl3, -tls1, -tls1.1 or -tls1.2"
    }
    set argc [llength $args]
    set sopts {}
    set iopts [concat [list -server $server] $defaults]	;# Import options

    for {set idx 0} {$idx < $argc} {incr idx} {
	set arg [lindex $args $idx]
	switch -glob -- $server,$arg {
	    0,-async	{lappend sopts $arg}
	    0,-myport	-
	    *,-type	-
	    *,-myaddr	{lappend sopts $arg [lindex $args [incr idx]]}
	    *,-cadir	-
	    *,-cafile	-
	    *,-certfile	-
	    *,-cipher	-
	    *,-command	-
	    *,-dhparams -
	    *,-keyfile	-
	    *,-password	-
	    *,-request	-
	    *,-require	-
            *,-servername -
	    *,-ssl2	-
	    *,-ssl3	-
	    *,-tls1	-
	    *,-tls1.1	-
	    *,-tls1.2	{lappend iopts $arg [lindex $args [incr idx]]}
	    -*		{return -code error "bad option \"$arg\": must be one of $options"}
	    default	{break}
	}
    }
    if {$server} {
	if {($idx + 1) != $argc} {
	    return -code error $usage
	}
	set uid [incr ::tls::srvuid]

	set port [lindex $args [expr {$argc-1}]]
	lappend sopts $port
	#set sopts [linsert $sopts 0 -server $callback]
	set sopts [linsert $sopts 0 -server [list tls::_accept $iopts $callback]]
	#set sopts [linsert $sopts 0 -server [list tls::_accept $uid $callback]]
    } else {
	if {($idx + 2) != $argc} {
	    return -code error $usage
	}
	set host [lindex $args [expr {$argc-2}]]
	set port [lindex $args [expr {$argc-1}]]
	lappend sopts $host $port
    }
    #
    # Create TCP/IP socket
    #
    set chan [eval $socketCmd $sopts]
    if {!$server && [catch {
	#
	# Push SSL layer onto socket
	#
	eval [list tls::import] $chan $iopts
    } err]} {
	set info ${::errorInfo}
	catch {close $chan}
	return -code error -errorinfo $info $err
    }
    return $chan
}

# tls::_accept --
#
#   This is the actual accept that TLS sockets use, which then calls
#   the callback registered by tls::socket.
#
# Arguments:
#   iopts	tls::import opts
#   callback	server callback to invoke
#   chan	socket channel to accept/deny
#   ipaddr	calling IP address
#   port	calling port
#
# Results:
#   Returns an error if the callback throws one.
#
proc tls::_accept { iopts callback chan ipaddr port } {
    log 2 [list tls::_accept $iopts $callback $chan $ipaddr $port]

    set chan [eval [list tls::import $chan] $iopts]

    lappend callback $chan $ipaddr $port
    if {[catch {
	uplevel #0 $callback
    } err]} {
	log 1 "tls::_accept error: ${::errorInfo}"
	close $chan
	error $err $::errorInfo $::errorCode
    } else {
	log 2 "tls::_accept - called \"$callback\" succeeded"
    }
}
#
# Sample callback for hooking: -
#
# error
# verify
# info
#
proc tls::callback {option args} {
    variable debug

    #log 2 [concat $option $args]

    switch -- $option {
	"error"	{
	    foreach {chan msg} $args break

	    log 0 "TLS/$chan: error: $msg"
	}
	"verify"	{
	    # poor man's lassign
	    foreach {chan depth cert rc err} $args break

	    array set c $cert

	    if {$rc != "1"} {
		log 1 "TLS/$chan: verify/$depth: Bad Cert: $err (rc = $rc)"
	    } else {
		log 2 "TLS/$chan: verify/$depth: $c(subject)"
	    }
	    if {$debug > 0} {
		return 1;	# FORCE OK
	    } else {
		return $rc
	    }
	}
	"info"	{
	    # poor man's lassign
	    foreach {chan major minor state msg} $args break

	    if {$msg != ""} {
		append state ": $msg"
	    }
	    # For tracing
	    upvar #0 tls::$chan cb
	    set cb($major) $minor

	    log 2 "TLS/$chan: $major/$minor: $state"
	}
	default	{
	    return -code error "bad option \"$option\":\
		    must be one of error, info, or verify"
	}
    }
}

proc tls::xhandshake {chan} {
    upvar #0 tls::$chan cb

    if {[info exists cb(handshake)] && \
	$cb(handshake) == "done"} {
	return 1
    }
    while {1} {
	vwait tls::${chan}(handshake)
	if {![info exists cb(handshake)]} {
	    return 0
	}
	if {$cb(handshake) == "done"} {
	    return 1
	}
    }
}

proc tls::password {} {
    log 0 "TLS/Password: did you forget to set your passwd!"
    # Return the worlds best kept secret password.
    return "secret"
}

proc tls::log {level msg} {
    variable debug
    variable logcmd

    if {$level > $debug || $logcmd == ""} {
	return
    }
    set cmd $logcmd
    lappend cmd $msg
    uplevel #0 $cmd
}

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ArrowButton</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ArrowButton</B>
 - Button widget with an arrow shape.
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ArrowButton</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowbd">-arrowbd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arrowrelief">-arrowrelief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-clean">-clean</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dir">-dir</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipadx">-ipadx</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipady">-ipady</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ArrowButton can be of two types following <B>type</B> option:
for <B>button</B> type, it is standard button with an arrow drawn on it;
for <B>arrow</B> type, it is an arrow like scrollbar's arrow.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is pressed
over the ArrowButton. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive
integer, this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the button and until
mouse button 1 is released.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowbd"><B>-arrowbd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the border width of the
arrow. Must be 1 or 2.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arrowrelief"><B>-arrowrelief</B></A></DT>
<DD>

When ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>, specifies the relief of the arrow.
Must be <B>raised</B> or <B>sunken</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-clean"><B>-clean</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a level of quality, between 0 and 2, for the arrow.
If 0, the arrow is drawn with its maximum width and height.
If 1, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd to have same edges.
If 2, the base of arrow is arranged to be odd and the orthogonal to be (base+1)/2 to
have 'straight' diagonal for edges.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton.  This command
is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the ArrowButton
window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dir"><B>-dir</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the direction of the arrow: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B>
or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the ArrowButton when mouse button 1 is released.
This command is called even if pointer is not over the ArrowButton, and always before
the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
<B>repeatinterval</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired height for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipadx"><B>-ipadx</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the right and left side
of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipady"><B>-ipady</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a minimun pad between the ArrowButton border and the top and bottom side
of the arrow. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies one of three states for the ArrowButton: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>.
<DL><DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>button</I>:</DT>
<DD>In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the
<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options. The active state is
typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
<B>activebackground</B> options. In disabled state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
<B>background</B> options determine how the ArrowButton is displayed.
</DD>
<DT>If ArrowButton <B>type</B> is <I>arrow</I>:</DT>
<DD>Only colors of arrow change. The background of ArrowButton is always
displayed using <B>troughcolor</B> option.
In normal state the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>background</B> option. The active
state is typically used when the pointer is over the ArrowButton. In active state
the ArrowButton is displayed using the <B>activebackground</B> option. In disabled state
the ArrowButton is displayed with a dark stipple.
</DD>
</DL>
Disabled state means that the ArrowButton
should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate
the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Determines the type of the ArrowButton: <B>button</B> for standard button look, or
<B>arrow</B> scrollbar's arrow look.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired width for the ArrowButton. The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>

If ArrowButton <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the button.
ArrowButton is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then ArrowButton is redisplayed with
normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
are called.
<P><B>invoke</B> is called when ArrowButton has input focus and user press the space bar.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>BWidget</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<IMG SRC="constr.gif" WIDTH="40" HEIGHT="40"> Under construction ...<BR>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>BWidget</B>
 - Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#XLFDfont"><B>XLFDfont</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#assert"><B>assert</B></A>
 <I>exp</I>
 ?<I>msg</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#badOptionString"><B>badOptionString</B></A>
 <I>type</I>
 <I>value</I>
 <I>list</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#bindMouseWheel"><B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#classes"><B>classes</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#clonename"><B>clonename</B></A>
 <I>menu</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#focus"><B>focus</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
 <I>path</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#get3dcolor"><B>get3dcolor</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>bgcolor</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#getname"><B>getname</B></A>
 <I>name</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#grab"><B>grab</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
 <I>path</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#inuse"><B>inuse</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#library"><B>library</B></A>
 <I>class</I> ?<i>class ...</i>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#lreorder"><B>lreorder</B></A>
 <I>list</I>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#parsetext"><B>parsetext</B></A>
 <I>text</I>
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#place"><B>place</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>w</I>
 <I>h</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#write"><B>write</B></A>
 <I>filename</I> ?<i>mode</i>?
</DD>
<DD>BWidget::<A HREF="#wrongNumArgsString"><B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
 <I>string</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Description text
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="XLFDfont">BWidget::<B>XLFDfont</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="assert">BWidget::<B>assert</B></A>
 <I>exp</I>
 ?<I>msg</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="badOptionString">BWidget::<B>badOptionString</B></A>
 <I>type</I>
 <I>value</I>
 <I>list</I>
</DT><DD>
Return a proper error string for a <i>value</i> of <i>type</i> that doesn't
match <i>list</i>.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="bindMouseWheel">BWidget::<B>bindMouseWheel</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>
    Bind the given <i>widget</i> with the standard mouse wheel bindings.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="classes">BWidget::<B>classes</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
</DT><DD>
    Returns a list of classes needed by the given <i>class</i>.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="clonename">BWidget::<B>clonename</B></A>
 <I>menu</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="focus">BWidget::<B>focus</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
 <I>path</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="get3dcolor">BWidget::<B>get3dcolor</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>bgcolor</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getname">BWidget::<B>getname</B></A>
 <I>name</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="grab">BWidget::<B>grab</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
 <I>path</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="inuse">BWidget::<B>inuse</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
</DT><DD>
    Returns true or false if the given <i>class</i> is being used by the
    current running program.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="library">BWidget::<B>library</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 ?<i>class ...</i>?
</DT><DD>
    Returns a string of code that contains all the libraries needed to
    use the widgets given by <i>class</i>.  Each class's code and the
    code of its dependent classes is appended to the string and returned.
    This is mostly useful for saving BWidgets to another project.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="lreorder">BWidget::<B>lreorder</B></A>
 <I>list</I>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="parsetext">BWidget::<B>parsetext</B></A>
 <I>text</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="place">BWidget::<B>place</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>w</I>
 <I>h</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
Used to position and resize the widget specified by
<I>path</I>. <I>w</I> and <I>h</I> are used to specify the requested
width and height of the <I>path</I> widget for use by <B>wm
geometry</B> (set to 0 to use current values). The placement of the widget relative to other widgets or
the screen is controlled by additional arguments:
<DL>
 <DT><B>at</B> <I>x</I> <I>y</I></DT>
 <DD>Place the widget specified by the <I>path</I> argument at screen
 position x,y. See <B>wm geometry</B> for information about window
 placement values.</DD>

 <DT><B>center</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
 <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget centered against <I>widget</I> or against the
 root widget if <I>widget</I> is not given.</DD>

 <DT><B>left</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
 <DT><B>right</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
 <DD>Place the <I>path</I> widget either left or right of the
 reference widget (or the root widget if <I>widget</I> is not
 specified). If the reference widget's position is such that the newly
 placed window might be obscured then the opposite side will be tried.</DD>

 <DT><B>above</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
 <DT><B>below</B> <I>?widget?</I></DT>
 <DD>As for left/right above, this option causes the widget to be
 placed either above or below the reference widget with the opposite
 placement being attempted if the newly placed widget will not be visible.
</DL>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="write">BWidget::<B>write</B></A>
 <I>filename</I>
 ?<i>mode</i>?
</DT><DD>
    Writes the currently used set of BWidget class code to the given
    <i>filename</i>.  All the code necessary to run the BWidgets
    currently in use is written to the file.  This is mostly useful
    for saving BWidget code to another project as a single file instead
    of the entire BWidget package.
</DD></DL>

<DL>
<DT><A NAME="wrongNumArgsString">BWidget::<B>wrongNumArgsString</B></A>
 <I>string</I>
</DT>
<DD>
    Returns a standard error string for the wrong number of arguments.
    <i>string</i> is appended to the standard string.
</DD>
</DL>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Button</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Button</B>
 - Button widget with enhanced options
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Button</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activebackground">-activebackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-activeforeground">-activeforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-compound">-compound</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-style">-style</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatdelay">-repeatdelay</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-repeatinterval">-repeatinterval</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-armcommand">-armcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-disarmcommand">-disarmcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

Button widget extends the Tk button with new options.
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
a new relief style, callback for <B>arm</B>/<B>disarm</B>, and
<B>repeatdelay</B>/<B>repeatinterval</B> options has been added.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-armcommand"><B>-armcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is pressed over the
Button. When <B>repeatdelay</B> or <B>repeatinterval</B> option is positive integer,
this command is repeatedly called if mouse pointer is over the Button and until mouse
button 1 is released.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button.  This command
is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the Button
window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies one of three states for the default ring: <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific
appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform
specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default
button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size.
In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without
leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result
in a smaller button than the active state.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-disarmcommand"><B>-disarmcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the Button when mouse button 1 is released.
This command is called even if pointer is not over the Button, and always before
the command specified by <B>command</B> option.
It is typically used in conjuntion with <B>armcommand</B>, <B>repeatdelay</B> and
<B>repeatinterval</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired height for the Button.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
screen units;
for text it is in lines of text.
If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired height is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
Option not available when widget is <I>themed</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a standard name for the button. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
found in the resources database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
are extracted from its value.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are standard values for
button relief (<B>raised</B>, <B>sunken</B>, <B>flat</B>, <B>ridge</B>, <B>solid</B>, and <B>groove</B>) and <B>link</B>, which specifies that button relief is <B>flat</B> when pointer
is outside the button and <B>raised</B> when pointer is inside.<BR>
This option has only the following effect if the widget is <I>themed</I>:
The value <B>link</B> used a style <B>Toolbutton</B> while any other value uses the standard effect.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies one of three states for the Button:  <B>normal</B>, <B>active</B>,
or <B>disabled</B>.  In normal state the Button is displayed using the
<B>foreground</B> and <B>background</B> options.  The active state is
typically used when the pointer is over the Button.  In active state
the Button is displayed using the <B>activeforeground</B> and
<B>activebackground</B> options.  Disabled state means that the Button
should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
In this state the <B>disabledforeground</B> and
<B>background</B> options determine how the Button is displayed.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label of the button.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
and so on.
<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
of the Button to call Button::<B>setfocus</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the Button then the value is in
screen units;
for text it is in characters.
If this option isn't specified, the Button's desired width is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>

If Button <B>state</B> is not disabled, this invoke the commands of the Button.
Button is redisplayed with active color and sunken relief, and
<B>armcommand</B> is called. Then Button is redisplayed with
normal color and its defined relief, and <B>disarmcommand</B> then <B>command</B>
are called.
<P><B>invoke</B> is called when Button has input focus and user press the space bar.

</DD></DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Invoke"><I>&lt;&lt;Invoke&gt;&gt;</I></A>
</DT><DD>

Invoke the <B>invoke</B> widget command.
</DD></DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ButtonBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ButtonBox</B>
 - Set of buttons with horizontal or vertical layout
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ButtonBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pady">-pady</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-spacing">-spacing</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
  <i>index</i> ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ButtonBox layouts Button horizontally or vertically.
Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
Button it work. This index may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
<DT>
<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
<DD>
Indicates the last item added.
<DT><B>default</B>
<DD>
Indicates the default Button.

<DT>
<i>name</i>
<DD>
Indicates the button whose <b>-name</b> option is <i>name</i>.

<DT>
<i>text</i>
<DD>
Indicates the button whose <b>-text</b> option is <i>text</i>.
</DL>

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-background"><B>-background</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a default background color for all added buttons and for the frame.<BR>
For <I>themed</I> wigets, the button color is not set.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the default button of the button box. The value is an integer
referencing the n-th added button, starting from 0.
If this value is -1 (the default), all button wil be drawn with their -default
option set to disabled, and this value can not be changed. <BR>If this value is 
not -1, the associated button is drawn with -default option set to active and
the others are drawn with -default option set to normal. The value can be changed
by configure.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not buttons must have the same width for horizontal layout.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-orient"><B>-orient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the orientation of the button box. If this option is <B>horizontal</B>
(the default), buttons are added from top to bottom. 
If this option is <B>vertical</B>, buttons are added from left to right.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a default value for the -padx option of all added buttons.<BR>
Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pady"><B>-pady</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a default value for the -pady option of all added buttons.<BR>
Option has no effect for <I>themed</I> wigets.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-spacing"><B>-spacing</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the default spacing between buttons. This value can be changed before each
call to <B>add</B>.

</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a state for all the buttons in the button box.  Can be any state supported by buttons.

</DD>
</DL>

<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Add a button to the button box.
<P>
See <A HREF="Button.html"><B>Button</B></A> for description of options.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Delete the button at <i>index</i> from the button box.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Insert a new button into the button box before the given index.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ComboBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ComboBox</B>
 - ComboBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ComboBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autocomplete">-autocomplete</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autopost">-autopost</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bwlistbox">-bwlistbox</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-expand">-expand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-hottrack">-hottrack</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-images">-images</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-listboxwidth">-listboxwidth</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-postcommand">-postcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#clearvalue"><B>clearvalue</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#get"><B>get</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getentry"><B>getentry</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getlistbox"><B>getlistbox</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#icursor"><B>icursor</B></A>
<I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#post"><B>post</B></A></DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#unpost"><B>unpost</B></A></DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ComboBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by
the <B>values</B> option.  The list of possible values can be popped by
pressing the ArrowButton or by clicking in the entry when <B>editable</B>
value of the ComboBox is <B>false</B>.<BR> If <B>editable</B> value of the
ComboBox is <B>true</B> and the entry has the focus, the user can press the
top and bottom arrow keys to modify its value. If the current value exactly
match a value in the list, then the previous (for top arrow key) or then
next (for bottom arrow key) value in the list is displayed.  If the current
value match the beginning of a value in the list, then this value is
displayed.  If the current value doesnt match anything, then the first
value is displayed.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-autocomplete"><B>-autocomplete</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    Specifies whether or not the combobox should attempt to auto-complete
    the value in the entry field as the user types.  If true, the combobox
    will fill in a value that it finds in its value list as the user types
    into the entry.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-autopost"><B>-autopost</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    Specifies whether or not the combobox should post the drop down as
    the user types.  If true, the combobox will post and scroll to the
    entry that most closely matches the user entry.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-bwlistbox"><B>-bwlistbox</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    Specifies that the combobox should use a BWidget listbox in its drop
    down instead of the standard Tk option.  This option is enabled by
    default if the <b>-images</b> option is not empty.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-expand"><B>-expand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the value expansion behavior for the window. It must be
<B>none</B> (default) or <B>tab</B>. If <B>tab</B> is specified, then
a Tab binding is added to attempt to expand the current value based on
the other values in <B>-values</B>.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less,
then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold
all the elements in the listbox.
</DD>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-hottrack"><B>-hottrack</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    The selection in the drop down listbox will follow the mouse cursor
    as it moves.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-images"><B>-images</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    A list of images that correspond to the <b>-values</b> option.  Each
    image will be drawn next to its value in the drop down.  This option
    enables the <b>-bwlistbox</b> by default as it is needed to display
    images.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-listboxwidth"><B>-listboxwidth</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    Specifies the width of the listbox in the drop down.  Defaults to the
    same size as the combobox.
    </DD>
</DL>

</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the ComboBox by selecting it in the listbox or pressing arrow key.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-postcommand"><B>-postcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command called before the listbox of the ComboBox is mapped.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the values to display in the listbox of the ComboBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Set bindings on the entry widget.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="clearvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>clearvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Clears the current text of the ComboBox.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string.  <I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted
by the creation command.  Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="get"><I>pathName</I> <B>get</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current contents of the entry.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="getentry"><I>pathName</I> <B>getentry</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the path to the contained entry widget.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="getlistbox"><I>pathName</I> <B>getlistbox</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the path to the listbox in the drop down.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the index of the current text of the ComboBox in the list of values,
or -1 if it doesn't match any value.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="icursor"><I>pathName</I> <B>icursor</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the
character given by <i>index</i>.  Returns an empty string.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="post"><I>pathName</I> <B>post</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Post the drop down.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the text of the ComboBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>last</B>
<DD>
Specifies the last element of the list of values.
<DT><B>first</B>
<DD>
Specifies the first element of the list of values.
<DT>
<B>next</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT><B>previous</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT>
@<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
</DL>

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="unpost"><I>pathName</I> <B>unpost</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Unpost the drop down.

</DD></DL>

<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>

When Entry of the ComboBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
to the default Entry bindings:
<UL>
<LI>Page up set the value of the ComboBox to the first value.
<LI>Page down set the value of the ComboBox to the last value.
<LI>Arrow up set the value of the ComboBox to the previous value.
<LI>Arrow down set the value of the ComboBox to the next value.
<LI>If <B>-autopost</B> is enabled, Escape unposts the listbox.
</UL>
If the listbox is not mapped and ComboBox is not editable or disabled,
mouse button 1 on the Entry cause the listbox to popup, as if the user press the ArrowButton.

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Dialog</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Dialog</B>
 - Dialog abstraction with custom buttons
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Dialog</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ButtonBox.html">OPTIONS from <B>ButtonBox</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>

<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-cancel">-cancel</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-default">-default</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-geometry">-geometry</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-image">-image</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modal">-modal</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-place">-place</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-transient">-transient</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#draw"><B>draw</B></A>
 ?<I>focus</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#enddialog"><B>enddialog</B></A>
 <I>result</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#withdraw"><B>withdraw</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

Dialog widget enables the user to create a dialog box.
Some commands take an <I>index</I> as argument indicating on which
Button it work. This index is the same specified for equivalent ButtonBox command:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the Button numerically, where 0 corresponds
to the first added Button, 1 to the next, and so on.
<DT>
<B>end</B> or <B>last</B>
<DD>
Indicates the last item added.
<DT><B>default</B>
<DD>
Indicates the default Button.
</DL>

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-anchor"><B>-anchor (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the anchor point of the ButtonBox.
Must be one of <B>w</B>, <B>e</B>, <B>n</B>, <B>s</B> or <B>c</B>.
If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>top</I> or <I>bottom</I>,
<B>anchor</B> values <I>n</I>, <I>s</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.
If <B>side</B> option is set to <I>left</I> or <I>right</I>,
<B>anchor</B> values <I>w</I>, <I>e</I> and <I>c</I> have the same effect.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-bitmap"><B>-bitmap (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a bitmap to display at the left of the user frame.
<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-cancel"><B>-cancel</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the cancel button of the Dialog. When user presses Esc or the windows close button,
this button is invoked.<BR>
If set to <B>-1</B>, Esc does not invoke anything.
The window close button <I>destroys</I> the dialog in this case and returns <B>-1</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-default"><B>-default</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the default button of the Dialog.
When user press Return in the Dialog, this button is invoked.
</DD>
</DL>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-geometry"><B>-geometry</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Set the <B>geometry</B> used when method <B>draw</B> is called.
See <B>wm geometry</B> for a parameter description.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-image"><B>-image (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an image to display at the left of the user frame.
<B>image</B> option override <B>bitmap</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modal"><B>-modal</B></A></DT>
<DD>

This option must be <B>none</B>, <B>local</B> or <B>global</B>. The value of this option
specifies the grab mode of the dialog and how works Dialog::<B>draw</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is placed relative to its parent. If empty, it is
placed relative to the root window. Also see <B>place</B> option.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-place"><B>-place</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies where to draw the Dialog toplevel relative to the dialog's
parent. Must be one of <B>none</B>, <B>center</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>right</B>,
<B>above</B>, <B>below</B>. Default value of <B>place</B> is <I>center</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not to draw a separator between the user frame and the ButtonBox.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies where to draw the ButtonBox relative to the user frame. Must be one of
<B>top</B>, <B>left</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Title of the Dialog toplevel.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-transient"><B>-transient (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies if the Dialog Toplevel should be a transient window or not. Default
value of <B>transient</B> is <I>true</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Add a button to the button box of the dialog box. Default -command option is
<I>Dialog::enddialog $path index</I> where <I>index</I> is number of button added.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="draw"><I>pathName</I> <B>draw</B></A>
 ?<I>focus</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command draw the Dialog, and set grab to it following <B>modal</B> option.
If <B>modal</B> option is set to <I>none</I>, the command returns immediatly
an empty string. In all other case, the command returns when Dialog::<B>enddialog</B>
is called or when Dialog is destroyed.
The return value is the result argument of Dialog::<B>enddialog</B> or -1 if it is destroyed.
<P>
By default, the focus is set to the default button referenced by <B>default</B> option,
or to the toplevel of Dialog if no default button has been set.
If <I>focus</I> is present, it must be a pathname, or an index to a button.
Initial focus is set on this pathname or corresponding button.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="enddialog"><I>pathName</I> <B>enddialog</B></A>
 <I>result</I>
</DT><DD>

This command is typically called within a command of a button to make Dialog::<B>draw</B>
return.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the user window.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Invoke the Button given by <I>index</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the focus to the Button given by <I>index</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="withdraw"><I>pathName</I> <B>withdraw</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Call this command to hide the dialog box.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DragSite</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DragSite</B>
 - Commands set for Drag facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>type</I>
 <I>event</I>
</DD>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DragSite::<A HREF="#setdrag"><B>setdrag</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 <I>initcmd</I>
 <I>endcmd</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drag site.



</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DragSite::<B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>type</I>
 <I>event</I>
</DT><DD>

This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drag site into
BWidget resources definition.
It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>: <I>-dragevent</I>, initialized to
<I>event</I>, <I>-draginitcmd</I> and <I>-dragendcmd</I>, initialized to empty string,
and two new options:
<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>-dragenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drag is active (initialized to 0)
<TR><TD><I>-dragtype</I><TD>Default or alternate dragged data type (initialized to <I>type</I>)
</TABLE>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DragSite::<B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drag site. Options are:

<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Command called when drag terminates (ie when user release drag icon).
This command is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the drag source (the widget itself),
<LI>the pathname of the drop target,
<LI>the operation,
<LI>the type of the dragged data,
<LI>the dragged data,
<LI>result of the drop (result of the call to <B>-dropcmd</B> of the target),
</UL>
If the drop does not occurs, the target and the operation are empty string and the result
is 0.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DragSite-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Command called when drag initiates. When the event of option <B>dragevent</B> occurs on
<I>path</I>, this command is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drag source (<I>path</I>),
<LI>root x-coordinate of pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of pointer,
<LI>a toplevel created to represent dragged data. When returning, if it
has no children, a bitmap is automatically displayed.
</UL>
If the command returns an empty string, then the drag will be
suppressed.  Otherwise the command must return a list containing three
elements:
<UL>
<LI>the type of the data,
<LI>the list of acceptable basic operations (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> and <B>link</B>)
<LI>and the data.
</UL>
Note that even if <B>copy</B> does not appear in the list of basic
operation, it is considered as an acceptable operation, since
<B>copy</B> semantic does not modify the drag source.

</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrag">DragSite::<B>setdrag</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 <I>initcmd</I>
 <I>endcmd</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
configuration.
<UL>
<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
<LI><I>initcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-init</I> event,
<LI><I>endcmd</I> BWidget command for <I>drag-end</I> event,
<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value has
changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
</UL>
<B>setdrag</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dragenabled</B> and
<B>dragevent</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
<I>initcmd</I> and <I>endcmd</I> arguments. <B>draginitcmd</B> and <B>dragendcmd</B> are not
taken from options of widget  because they are considered as user command, called by
BWidget implementation of <I>drag-init</I> and <I>drag-end</I> events.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DropSite</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DropSite</B>
 - Commands set for Drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>types</I>
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setcursor"><B>setcursor</B></A>
 <I>cursor</I>
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setdrop"><B>setdrop</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 <I>dropover</I>
 <I>drop</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DropSite::<A HREF="#setoperation"><B>setoperation</B></A>
 <I>op</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

Commands of this namespace enable user to define a BWidget or a Tk widget as a drop site.
A drop site is composed of the type of object that can be dropped and associated operation,
a command called when drop occurs, and a command when an object is dragged over the widget.
A drop site must have at least one type of acceptable object and a drop command.

</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DropSite::<B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>types</I>
</DT><DD>

This command provides a simple way to include options relatives to a drop site into
BWidget resources definition.
It includes the options needed for <B>register</B>, <I>-dropovercmd</I> and <I>-dropcmd</I>,
initialized to empty string, and <I>-droptypes</I>, initialized to <I>types</I>,
and one new option:
<TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>-dropenabled</I><TD>Specifies wether or not drop is active (initialized to 0)
</TABLE>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DropSite::<B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command is used to declare <I>path</I> as a drop site. Options are:

<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

This command is called when user release the drag icon over a valid
drop target widget.  Arguments passed to the command are:

<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
<LI>pathname of the drag source,
<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>operation,
<LI>type of the dragged data,
<LI>dragged data.
</UL>

Its return values is passed as a result to the <B>-dragendcmd</B>
command of the drag source widget.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

This command can be used to provide a dynamic drag while <I>drag-over</I> events.
While a drag occurs, events &lt;Enter&gt;, &lt;Motion&gt; and &lt;Leave&gt; are catched.
Arguments passed to the command are:
<UL>
<LI>pathname of the drop target (the widget itself),
<LI>pathname of the drag source,
<LI>event over the drop target: <I>enter</I>, <I>motion</I> or <I>leave</I>,
<LI>root x-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>root y-coordinate of the pointer,
<LI>operation,
<LI>type of the dragged data,
<LI>dragged data.
</UL>
Command must the new status of the drag:
<UL>
<LI>0  if widget refuse this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
<LI>1  if widget accept this drag. Command will not be recalled on motion/leave event.
<LI>2  if widget refuse this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.
<LI>3  if widget accept this drag. Command will be recalled on each motion event to reevaluate.

</UL>
Here is a list of events and associated actions on a DropSite widget. This example
assumes that dragged data type is valid for the drop target.
<B>status</B> is the status of the drag on a DropSite. Its value is:
<BR><BR>

<TABLE BORDER CELLSPACING=1 CELLPADDING=4>
<TR>
<TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Event</TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Old status</TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">Action</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ALIGN="CENTER">New status</TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Enter&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>if DropSite has <B>dropovercmd</B>, call it with <I>enter</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>else</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Motion&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>unchanged</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>motion</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>result of <B>dropovercmd</B></FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=2>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Leave&gt;</FONT>&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0 or 1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">&nbsp;</TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2 or 3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I></FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="18%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
<FONT SIZE=2>&lt;Drop&gt;</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>0</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="24%" VALIGN="TOP" ROWSPAN=4>
<FONT SIZE=2>-</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>1</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>2</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropovercmd</B> with <I>leave</I> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
<TR><TD WIDTH="10%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>3</FONT></TD>
<TD WIDTH="48%" VALIGN="TOP">
<FONT SIZE=2>call <B>dropcmd</B> and call <B>dragendcmd</B> of drag source</FONT></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE>
<BR>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DropSite-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list {<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I> ?<I>type</I> <I>oplist</I>? ...} of acceptable
types and associated operations for the drop target.
For each type, <I>oplist</I> is a list
{<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I> ?<I>descops</I> <I>mod</I>? ...} describing operations and
modifier keys for these operations.
<I>descops</I> describe an operation. It can be a predefined operations (<B>copy</B>,
<B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) or a new user defined operation, of the form {<I>subop</I>
<B>baseop</B> ?<I>bitmap</I>?}.
<I>subop</I> is the name given to the sub operation, <I>baseop</I> is the name of the
base operation (<B>copy</B>, <B>move</B> or <B>link</B>) and <I>bitmap</I> is a bitmap
to display for the operation.
<BR>If <I>bitmap</I> is empty, the default bitmap of the base operation is used for the
sub operation.
<BR><I>subop</I> can be a base operation, in order to change the bitmap of a base operation.
In this case, <I>baseop</I> must be empty or equal to <I>subop</I>.
<BR><I>mod</I> is the modifer key for the operation. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><B>none</B> to specify that no modifier key is pressed. This modifier can only be used
with a sub operation named <B>default</B> (and vice versa), which has the behaviour of not
display any bitmap operation. For all type, if the modifier <B>none</B> is not given, it is
automatically associated to the <B>default</B> sub operation of a <B>copy</B> base operation.
<LI><B>program</B> to specifies a sub operation accessible only by <B>DropSite::setoperation</B>.
<LI>A list combining <B>shift</B>, <B>control</B> and <B>alt</B>, which means their 
corresponding key.
</UL>

</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setcursor">DropSite::<B>setcursor</B></A>
 <I>cursor</I>
</DT><DD>

This command can be used within the script <B>dragovercmd</B>. It is usefull to provide
visual effect about the state of the drag.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setdrop">DropSite::<B>setdrop</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 <I>dropover</I>
 <I>drop</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command provides a simple way to call <B>register</B> during a BWidget creation or
configuration.
<UL>
<LI><I>path</I> is the pathname of the BWidget,
<LI><I>subpath</I> is the pathname of the tk widget where drag event occurs,
<LI><I>dropover</I> is a command for <I>drag-over</I> event,
<LI><I>drop</I> is a command for <I>drop</I> event,
<LI><I>force</I> specifies wether or not to call <B>register</B> whenever no option value
has changed (0 by default - for BWidget configuration, use 1 for BWidget creation).
</UL>
<B>setdrop</B> verifies the modification flag of options <B>dropenabled</B> and
<B>droptypes</B> and calls <B>register</B> if needed according to the options values and
<I>dropover</I> and <I>drop</I> arguments. <B>dropovercmd</B> and <B>dropcmd</B> are not
taken from options of widget because they are considered as user command, called by
BWidget implementation of <I>drag-over</I> and <I>drop</I> events.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setoperation">DropSite::<B>setoperation</B></A>
 <I>op</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>DynamicHelp</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>DynamicHelp</B>
 - Provide help to Tk widget or BWidget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
<i>widget</i> ?<I>option value ...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
<i>widget</i>
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#include"><B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>type</I>
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#register"><B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>type</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD>DynamicHelp::<A HREF="#sethelp"><B>sethelp</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>
Description text
</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">COMMAND</A></B><BR>

<DL><DT><A NAME="add">DynamicHelp::<B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>option value ...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
This command adds dynamic help to the given <i>widget</i>.
</p>
    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    	If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help
	text to display.  The command must return a string to display.
	If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-index"><B>-index</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
	If specified, refers to a menu index to bind the help to instead of
	a widget.  If <b>-type</b> is not menu, this option is ignored.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-item"><B>-item</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    	If specified, refers to an item or tag on a canvas widget or to a tag
        in a text widget to bind the help to instead of to a widget.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
	Specifies the type of help.  Can be:
	<b>balloon</b>, <b>variable</b> or <b>menu</b>.
	Default is <b>balloon</b>.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    	The text to be displayed as help.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <DL><DT><A NAME="add-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    	Specifies a variable name to which the help string will be
        written.  Some other widget (e.g., a status bar) is
        responsible for displaying this variable.
    </DD>
    </DL>

    <p>
    Creating dynamic help for a menu is a two-step process.  The menu
    itself must first be added and then each menu entry must be added
    separately.  Here is a brief example.
    </p>

    <TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
    <TR><TD><PRE>
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
    menu .m -type menubar
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
    . configure -menu .m
    .m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
    menu .m.file
    .m.file add command -label "Open..."
    .m.file add command -label "Quit"
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
    label .l -textvariable varinfo
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -variable varinfo
    <FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 0 -text "Detach menu"
    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 1 -text "Open a file"
    DynamicHelp::add .m.file -type menu -index 2 -text "Exit demo"
    </PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>

</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="configure">DynamicHelp::<B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
This command configure the ballon help.
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-borderwidth"><B>-borderwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Width of the black border around the balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-delay"><B>-delay</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Define the delay in millisecond of mouse inactivity before displaying
the balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<dl>
    <dt><a name="DynamicHelp-state"><b>-state</b></a></dt>
    <dd>
    Specifies one of two states for help balloons: <b>normal</b> and
    <b>disabled</b>.
    </dd>
    <dd>
    If <b>state</b> is <b>disabled</b>, help balloons will not be displayed
    for any registered widget.
    </dd>
</dl>
<DL><DT><A NAME="DynamicHelp-topbackground"><B>-topbackground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The background color of the toplevel window created for a balloon.
</DD>
</DL>
<BR>Other standard options are:
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="delete">DynamicHelp::<B>delete</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>
    Delete all dynamic help for the given <i>widget</i>.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="include">DynamicHelp::<B>include</B></A>
 <I>class</I>
 <I>type</I>
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="register">DynamicHelp::<B>register</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>type</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>
<p>
<b>Its use is deprecated.  Use <i>DynamicHelp::add</i> instead.</b>
</p>

Register a help text to the widget <I>path</I>.
<I>type</I> determines the type of the help or the type of the widget.
Depending on <I>type</I>, other options must be provided.
<BR>
<TABLE CELLSPACING=5 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR><TD><B>    type      </B></TD><TD><B>     options      </B></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> balloon   </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? text </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> variable  </I></B></TD><TD><I> ?tagOrItem? varName text </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> menu      </I></B></TD><TD><I> varName      </I></TD></TR>
<TR><TD><B><I> menuentry </I></B></TD><TD><I> index text   </I></TD></TR>
</TABLE>
<BR>If one of the option is missing or is empty, help is removed for this widget.
<p>

If <i>tagOrItem</i> is specified, then <i>path</i> is a canvas or a text. In
case of a canvas, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the name of a tag or item on the canvas
to which the help will be bound. In case of a text, <i>tagOrItem</i> is the
name of a tag on the text to which the help will be bound.

</p>
For type other than <I>balloon</I>, <I>varName</I> is typically a variable
linked to a label.
<BR>For menu, balloon type help is not available. To declare a help for menu,
you first declare the menu, and then entries of this menu.
<BR>For example:
<BR><BR>
<CENTER>
<TABLE BORDER=2 CELLSPACING=2 WIDTH="80%">
<TR><TD><PRE>
     <FONT COLOR=red><I># create menu</I></FONT>
menu .m -type menubar
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate menubar to toplevel BEFORE DynamicHelp::register</I></FONT>
<FONT COLOR=red><I># to make it works with menu clone name</I></FONT>
. configure -menu .m
.m add cascade -label "File" -menu .m.file
menu .m.file
.m.file add command -label "Open..."
.m.file add command -label "Quit"
<FONT COLOR=red><I># create label for help, using variable varinfo</I></FONT>
label .l -textvariable varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># associate all entries of menu .m.file to variable varinfo</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menu varinfo
<FONT COLOR=red><I># then declare entries of .m.file</I></FONT>
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 0 "Detach menu"
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 1 "Open a file"
DynamicHelp::register .m.file menuentry 2 "Exit demo"
</PRE></TD></TR></TABLE></CENTER>
<BR>
<BR>Notice that if popup menu is owned by a menubar, you must associate first the menubar
to its toplevel. In this case, when you create a menu popup, its clone window is also
created, and DynamicHelp::register detects the exitence of the clone window and maps
events to it.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="sethelp">DynamicHelp::<B>sethelp</B></A>
 <I>path</I>
 <I>subpath</I>
 ?<I>force</I>?
</DT><DD>
Description text
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Entry</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Entry</B>
 - Entry widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Entry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledbackground">-disabledbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertbackground">-insertbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertborderwidth">-insertborderwidth</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectborderwidth">-selectborderwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-exportselection">-exportselection</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertofftime">-insertofftime</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertontime">-insertontime</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-insertwidth">-insertwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-editable">-editable</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-show">-show</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#invoke"><B>invoke</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

The <B>Entry</B> widget extends the default Tk entry. Options have been added to provide
visual effect depending on the state of the Entry,
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options,
and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag</A> and
<A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
Entry behaves much like a Label, with <B>text</B> option to set its contents.
<BR>Tk entry command can also be used on Entry widget.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command when user press &lt;Return&gt; in the Entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

<BR>If <B>dragendcmd</B> is empty, the internal <I>dragend</I> command updates the entry
following the operation (<B>move</B> or <B>copy</B>) and the dragged data
(whole or selected part of the entry).

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

<BR>if <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the command refuse the drag if entry is empty or if
portion of text is selected and event doesn't occur above the selection. In all other cases,
the command returns:
<UL>
<LI>as the data type, the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TEXT</I> if empty,
<LI>as the operations, <I>{copy move}</I> if <B>state</B> is normal and <B>editable</B>
is true, or <I>{copy}</I> only in other cases, 
<LI>as the data, the whole content or the selected portion of the entry.
</UL>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract current position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>dropcmd</B> option described in
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the wrapper updates the entry following the type of data:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Entry</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Entry</TD>
<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Entry to display the associated string.</TD>
</TABLE></DL>
and returns 1.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Entry has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, the wrapper accepts the drop if <B>editable</b> option is
true and <B>state</B> option is normal.
<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the Entry,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>the event,
<LI>the numeric index in the entry designated by the cursor,
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>dropovercmd</B> option described in
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.

Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I> and <I>TEXT</I>,
all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-editable"><B>-editable</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies whether the Entry is editable by the user. Equivalent to the <B>state</B> option
of the Tk entry widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-show"><B>-show</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the
window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character
in the value of this option, such as ``*''. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to
be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies one of two states for the Entry:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
In normal state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
In disabled state the text of the Entry is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B>
option. If the entry is disabled then the value may not be changed by user input
and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget.
Disabled state is the same as not editable with visual effect.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size
characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks
a size just large enough to hold its current text.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="invoke"><I>pathName</I> <B>invoke</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Calls the command specified by the option <B>-command</B>.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Label</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Label</B>
 - Label widget with <B>state</B> option, dynamic help and drag and drop facilities
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Label</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-bitmap">-bitmap</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-disabledforeground">-disabledforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-image">-image</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-justify">-justify</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-wraplength">-wraplength</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-focus">-focus</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptext">-helptext</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helptype">-helptype</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-helpvar">-helpvar</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-name">-name</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-state">-state</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-underline">-underline</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setfocus"><B>setfocus</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

The <B>Label</B> widget extends the default Tk label. Options have been added to provide
visual effect depending on the state of the Label, <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> options, and <A HREF="DragSite.html">Drag
</A> and <A HREF="DropSite.html">Drop</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when <B>dragevent</B> occurs on widget.
<B>draginitcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>draginitcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, the internal <B>draginitcmd</B> command is used instead
and returns:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD valign=top><I>IMAGE&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;image&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
<TD>if an image is displayed.
<TR><TD valign=top><I>BITMAP&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;bitmap&nbsp;name&gt;</I>
<TD>if a bitmap is displayed.
<TR><TD valign=top><I>TEXT&nbsp;{copy}&nbsp;&lt;text&gt;</I>
<TD>if a text is displayed.
</TABLE></DL>
Note that if <B>dragtype</B> option is not empty, its value is used instead of those above.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drop occurs on the widget.
<B>dropcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dropcmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is empty, the command updates the label following the type of the data:
<DL><DD><TABLE BORDER=0 CELLSPACING=1>
<TR><TD><I>COLOR</I> or <I>FGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>foreground</B> of the Label.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BGCOLOR</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the <B>background</B> of the Label.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>IMAGE</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated image.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>BITMAP</I></TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated bitmap.
<B>image</B> option is set to empty.</TD>
<TR><TD><I>TEXT</I>,<BR>or any other tag</TD>
<TD>reconfigure the Label to display the associated string.
<B>image</B> and <B>bitmap</B> options are set to empty.</TD>
</TABLE></DL>
and returns 1.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drag icon is over the widget.
<B>dropovercmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dropovercmd</B> of <B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

<BR>If <B>dropovercmd</B> is empty, Label always accepts the drop if data type is
<I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, and accepts all other data type only if
<B>state</B> is normal.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.

Default accepts <I>FGCOLOR</I>, <I>COLOR</I>, <I>BGCOLOR</I>, <I>TEXT</I>, <I>BITMAP</I>
and <I>IMAGE</I>, all with <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B> operations.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-focus"><B>-focus</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a pathname to set the focus on for Label::<B>setfocus</B> command.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired height for the label.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
screen units, for text it is in lines of text.
If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.<BR>
Option not available for <I>themed</I> widgets.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Text for dynamic help. If empty, no help is available for this widget.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-name"><B>-name</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a standard name for the label. If the option <B>*<I>name</I>Name</B> is
found in the resource database, then <B>text</B> and <B>underline</B> options
are extracted from its value.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies one of two states for the Label:  <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.
In normal state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>foreground</B> option.
In disabled state the text of the Label is displayed using the <B>disabledforeground</B> option.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-underline"><B>-underline</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the label.
0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character,
and so on.
<BR>The binding <B>&lt;Alt-<I>char</I>&gt;</B> is automatically set on the toplevel
of the Label to call Label::<B>setfocus</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired width for the label.
If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
screen units, for text it is in characters.
If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed
from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setfocus"><I>pathName</I> <B>setfocus</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Set the focus on the pathname given by <B>-focus</B> option if <B>-state</B> is <I>normal</I>.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>LabelEntry</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>LabelEntry</B>
 - 
LabelFrame containing an Entry widget.

</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelEntry</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="LabelFrame.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelFrame</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-label (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor (see <B>-anchor</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont (see <B>-font</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight (see <B>-height</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify (see <B>-justify</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth (see <B>-width</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-side</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

LabelEntry is a widget composed of <A HREF="LabelFrame.html">LabelFrame</A> widget
containing an <A HREF="Entry.html">Entry</A> widget.
Tk entry command can also be used on LabelEntry widget.

</P>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Set bindings on the entry widget.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>LabelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>LabelFrame</B>
 - Frame with a Label
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>LabelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Label.html">OPTIONS from <B>Label</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-bitmap</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-focus</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-height</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-image</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-name</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-underline</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD>LabelFrame::<A HREF="#align"><B>align</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

LabelFrame enables user to create a frame with a
<A HREF="Label.html">Label</A> positionned at any side.
LabelFrame is used by <A HREF="ComboBox.html">ComboBox</A>
and <A HREF="SpinBox.html">SpinBox</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies where to position the Label relative to the user frame: <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B>, <B>left</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="align">LabelFrame::<B>align</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command align label of all widget given by <I>args</I> of class LabelFrame
(or "derived") by setting their width to the max one +1

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ListBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ListBox</B>
 - ListBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ListBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-autofocus">-autofocus</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-multicolumn">-multicolumn</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectmode">-selectmode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>text</I>
 ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
 ?<I>clickres</I>?
 ?<I>select</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>item</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#item"><B>item</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#items"><B>items</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

<B>ListBox</B> widget uses canvas to display a list of items.
Each item is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
image or window. Each item is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
A item is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
<B>insert</B> command). The ListBox can have one or more columns, depending on
<B>multicolumn</B> option. The user do not handle columns; the number of columns
is determined following the height of the ListBox in order to see each item vertically.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-autofocus"><B>-autofocus (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    If this option is true, the listbox will take focus any time the user
    clicks in it.  Without focus, the listbox's mouse wheel bindings will
    not work properly.  The default is true.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies horizontal pad between each columns.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies vertical size of the items.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
if no item is designated. In other cases:
<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
<UL>
<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> if empty as the data type, 
<LI><I>{move copy link}</I> as the operations, 
<LI>the item identifier as the data.
</UL>
If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the identifier of the dragged item,
<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

ListBox has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract item and position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
<LI><I>{</I><B>item</B> <I>item}</I> or
<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>index}</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>

<p>
The default drop command allows for drag-and-drop within the listbox but
not to or from other widgets.
</p>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

LsitBox has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the listbox,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
<UL>
<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
<LI>the targeted item if drag icon points an item and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains
<I>i</I>, else empty string.
<LI>an index within two items where drag icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option
contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside an item and between two
items. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>item</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
The command must return a list with two elements:
<UL>
<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>item</I> or <I>position</I>.
</UL>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two items,
and <B>i</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside items.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.

<BR>Default is <I>LISTBOX_ITEM</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the listbox in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-multicolumn"><B>-multicolumn</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not ListBox layouts items in order to see each one vertically.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies distance between image or window and text of the items.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not the listbox should be redrawn when entering idle.
Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the listbox.

</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    If true, the listbox will draw a selection rectangle that fills the
    listbox from left-to-right instead of just drawing a box around the
    selected item.  This more closely mimics the standard Tk listbox.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectmode"><B>-selectmode</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired selection-mode for the listbox. Must be one of
<B>none</B>, <B>single</B> or <B>multiple</B>. <B>selectmode</B> <I>single</I>
allows to select 1 item by its text or image. <B>selectmode</B> <I>multiple</I>
allows to select multiple items by their text or image. For more info on
selectmodes <I>single</I> or <I>multiple</I>, see the Tk <B>listbox</B>
command. Default value for <B>selectmode</B> is <I>none</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the listbox in units of 8 pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a item.
The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.

<p>
Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
path of the listbox.
</p>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a item.
The item idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command.

<p>
Any occurrence of <b>%W</b> in <i>script</i> is substituted with the
path of the listbox.
</p>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Deletes all items in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
of items or a list of list of items.
To delete all items, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName items]</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>text</I>
 ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
 ?<I>clickres</I>?
 ?<I>select</I>?
</DT><DD>

Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of an item.
<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
if edition is accepted.
<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
In all other case, the edition continues.
<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
and continue edition.
<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns 1 if <I>item</I> exists in the listbox, else 0.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the position of <I>item</I> in the list.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>item</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

<p>
Inserts a new item identified by <I>item</I> in the list at position <I>index</I>.
</p>

<p>
Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the item name will be replaced by the
number of the item in the order of insertion.
</p>

<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
<DD>

User data associated to the item.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the foreground color of the label of the item.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a font for the label of the item.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the item.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-indent"><B>-indent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the amount of extra space in pixels at the left of the item.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the label of the item.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Item-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the item.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="item"><I>pathName</I> <B>item</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>items</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the item at index <I>first</I> in the list, 
or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>last</I> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all
of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>, inclusive. 
Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all items.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the item at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the items between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Moves <I>item</I> at position <I>index</I> in the list.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>

Modifies the order of items in the listbox given by <I>neworder</I>. Items that do not
appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
 <I>item</I>
</DT><DD>

Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>item</I> visible.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Modifies the list of selected items following <I>cmd</I>:
<DL>
<DT><B>clear</B>
<DD>remove all items of the selection.
<DT><B>set</B>
<DD>set the selection to all items in <I>arg</I>
<DT><B>add</B>
<DD>add all items of <I>arg</I> in the selection
<DT><B>remove</B>
<DD>remove all items of <I>arg</I> of the selection
<DT><B>get</B>
<DD>return the current selected items
</DL>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>


<b>BINDINGS</b>

<p>
A <b>&lt;&lt;ListboxSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
selection in the listbox changes.
</p>

<p>
The listbox has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
</p>
</p>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>MainFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>MainFrame</B>
 - Manage toplevel with menu, toolbar and statusbar 
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MainFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressmax (see <B>-maximum</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progresstype (see <B>-type</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-progressvar (see <B>-variable</B>)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-menu">-menu</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-separator">-separator</A></TD></TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sizegrip">-sizegrip</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addindicator"><B>addindicator</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#addtoolbar"><B>addtoolbar</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getindicator"><B>getindicator</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getmenu"><B>getmenu</B></A>
 <I>menuid</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#gettoolbar"><B>gettoolbar</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setmenustate"><B>setmenustate</B></A>
 <I>tag</I>
 <I>state</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showstatusbar"><B>showstatusbar</B></A>
 <I>name</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#showtoolbar"><B>showtoolbar</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>bool</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

MainFrame manage toplevel to have:<BR>
<UL>
<LI>simple menu creation, with automatic accelerator bindings and
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> association,</LI>
<LI>one or more toolbars that user can hide,</LI>
<LI>a status bar, displaying a user message or a menu description, and optionally a
<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.</LI>
</UL>
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
will not request any size at all.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-menu"><B>-menu (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

This option describes the menu. This is a list whose each five elements describe
one cascade menu. It has the following form:
{<I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>...}
where <I>menuentries</I> is a list where each element describe one menu entry, which can be:
<UL>
<LI>for a separator:<BR>
  {<B>separator</B>}</LI>
<LI>for a command:<BR>
  {<B>command</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a check button:<BR>
  {<B>checkbutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I>? ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a radio button:<BR>
  {<B>radiobutton</B> <I>menuname</I> ?<I>tags</I>? ?<I>description</I>? ?<I>accelerator</I> ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I>? ...}</LI>
<LI>for a cascade menu:<BR>
  {<B>cascade</B> <I>menuname</I> <I>tags</I> <I>menuId</I> <I>tearoff</I> <I>menuentries</I>}</LI>
</UL>
where:
<UL>
<LI><I>menuname</I> is the name of the menu. If it contains a &amp;, the following character
is automatically converted to the corresponding <B>-underline</B> option of <B>menu add</B>
command.</LI>
<LI><I>tags</I> is the tags list for the entry, used for enabling or disabling menu
entries with <B>MainFrame::setmenustate</B>.</LI>
<LI><I>menuId</I> is an id for the menu, from which you can get menu pathname with
 <B>MainFrame::getmenu</B>.</LI>
<LI><I>tearoff</I> specifies if menu has tearoff entry.</LI>
<LI><I>description</I> specifies a string for <A HREF=\"DynamicHelp.html\">DynamicHelp</A>.</LI>
<LI><I>accelerator</I> specifies a key sequence. It is a list of two elements, where the first
is one of <B>Shift</B>, <B>Ctrl</B>, <B>Alt</B>, <B>CtrlAlt</B>, <B>Cmd</B>,  or <B>ShiftCmd</B>, and the second as letter
(see <A HREF="#-casesensitive">-casesensitive</A> option for interpretation),  digit or
a special key name.
An accelerator string is build and corresponding binding set on the toplevel to invoke the
menu entry.</LI>
<LI><I>option value</I> specifies additionnal options for the entry (see <B>menu add</B>
command).</LI>
</UL>
Each value enclosed by ? are optional and defaulted to empty string, but must be
provided if one or more following options is not empty.
<BR>Example:
<PRE>
set descmenu {
    "&File" {} {} 0 {
        {command "&New"     {} "Create a new document"     {Ctrl n} -command Menu::new}
        {command "&Open..." {} "Open an existing document" {Ctrl o} -command Menu::open}
        {command "&Save"    open "Save the document" {Ctrl s} -command Menu::save}
        {cascade  "&Export"  {} export 0 {
            {command "Format &1" open "Export document to format 1" {} -command {Menu::export 1}}
            {command "Format &2" open "Export document to format 2" {} -command {Menu::export 2}}
        }}
        {separator}
        {cascade "&Recent files" {} recent 0 {}}
        {separator}
        {command "E&xit" {} "Exit the application" {} -command Menu::exit}
    }
    "&Options" {} {} 0 {
        {checkbutton "Toolbar" {} "Show/hide toolbar" {}
            -variable Menu::_drawtoolbar
            -command  {$Menu::_mainframe showtoolbar toolbar $Menu::_drawtoolbar}
        }
    }
}
</PRE>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-separator"><B>-separator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies if separator should be drawn at the top and/or at the bottom of the user window.
Must be one of the values <B>none</B>, <B>top</B>, <B>bottom</B> or <B>both</B>.
It depends on the relief of subwidgets of user window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-textvariable"><B>-textvariable</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the textvariable option for the label of the status bar.
<A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A> description
of menu entries are mapped to this variable at the creation of the MainFrame.
If this variable is changed by MainFrame::configure, menu description will
not be available.
<BR>You change the text of the label by modifying the value of the variable.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the user frame in any of the forms acceptable to
Tk_GetPixels. If this option is less than or equal to zero (the default) then the window
will not request any size at all.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sizegrip"><B>-sizegrip (themed, read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If bool argument is true and themed mode, show a ttk sizegrip widget in the lower-right corner.
</DD>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="addindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>addindicator</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Add an indicator box at the right of the status bar. Each indicator are added from left
to right. An indicator is a Tk label widget configured with option-value pair
given by ?<I>arg...</I>?. <B>-relief</B> and <B>-borderwidth</B> options are respetively
defaulted to <I>sunken</I> and 1. Returns the pathname of the created label.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="addtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>addtoolbar</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Add a toolbar to the MainFrame. Returns the pathname of the new window where to place
toolbar items.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the user window.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getindicator"><I>pathName</I> <B>getindicator</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added indicator.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenu"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenu</B></A>
 <I>menuid</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the menu whose id is <I>menuid</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>getmenustate</B></A>
 <I>tag</I>
 <I>state</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the state of the given menu <I>tag</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="gettoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>gettoolbar</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setmenustate"><I>pathName</I> <B>setmenustate</B></A>
 <I>tag</I>
 <I>state</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the <B>-state</B> option value of all the menu entries that have the tag <I>tag</I>
to <I>state</I>.
A menu entry is disabled, if one of its associated tags have state <B>disabled</B>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="showstatusbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showstatusbar</B></A>
 <I>name</I>
</DT><DD>

<I>name</I> is one of <B>none</B>, <B>status</B> or <B>progression</B>.
Use <B>none</B> to hide the status bar, <B>status</B> to display the label only, or
<B>progression</B> to display the label and the
<A HREF="ProgressBar.html">ProgressBar</A>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="showtoolbar"><I>pathName</I> <B>showtoolbar</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>bool</I>
</DT><DD>

Hide if <I>bool</I> is 0, or show if <I>bool</I> is 1 the <I>index</I>th added toolbar.
To prevent your toplevel from resizing while hiding/showing toolbar,
do [wm geometry $top [wm geometry $top]] when it is managed.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>MessageDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>MessageDlg</B>
 - Message dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>MessageDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-anchor">-anchor</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-padx">-padx</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-pady">-pady</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-cancel</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-default</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-aspect">-aspect</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttons">-buttons</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-buttonwidth">-buttonwidth</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-icon">-icon</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-justify">-justify</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-message">-message</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

MessageDlg provides a simple way to display a message dialog.
MessageDlg::<B>create</B> creates the message dialog, displays
it and return the index of the pressed button, or -1 if it is destroyed.
When returning, the dialog no longer exists.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-aspect"><B>-aspect</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
aspect ratio for the text.  The aspect ratio is specified as
100*width/height.  100 means the text should
be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
Used to choose line length for text if <B>width</B> option
isn't specified.
Defaults to 150.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttons"><B>-buttons</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of buttons to display when <B>type</B> option is <I>user</I>.
If a button has a symbolic name, its associated text will be displayed.

</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-buttonwidth"><B>-buttonwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies the standard width of the buttons in the dialog.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-icon"><B>-icon</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an icon to display. Must be one of the following: <B>error</B>, <B>info</B>,
<B>question</B> or <B>warning</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-justify"><B>-justify</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies how to justify lines of text.
Must be one of <B>left</B>, <B>center</B>, or <B>right</B>.  Defaults
to <B>left</B>.
This option works together with the <B>anchor</B>, <B>aspect</B>,
<B>padx</B>, <B>pady</B>, and <B>width</B> options to provide a variety
of arrangements of the text within the window.
The <B>aspect</B> and <B>width</B> options determine the amount of
screen space needed to display the text.
The <B>anchor</B>, <B>padx</B>, and <B>pady</B> options determine where this
rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
<B>justify</B> option determines how each line is displayed within that
rectangular region.
For example, suppose <B>anchor</B> is <B>e</B> and <B>justify</B> is
<B>left</B>, and that the message window is much larger than needed
for the text.
The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
line up and the right edge of the longest line is <B>padx</B> from
the right side of the window;  the entire text block will be centered
in the vertical span of the window.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-message"><B>-message</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the message to display in this message box.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box.
If the value is empty (the default), a default title will be set corresponding
to the <B>icon</B> option.
The default associated title is in english, and can be modified to set it in
another language by specifying the resource:
<PRE>    *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title:   <I>value</I></PRE>
or the equivalent tcl command:
<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.<I>name</I>Title <I>value</I></PRE>
where <I>name</I> is the name of an icon as defined in the <B>icon</B> option.
<BR>For example, for french language, you can specify for a warning dialog:
<PRE>    option add *MessageDlg.warningTitle  "Attention"</PRE>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
<DD>
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>abortretryignore</B>
<DD>
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>abort</B>,
<B>retry</B> and <B>ignore</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>ok</B>
<DD>
Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>okcancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>retrycancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>retry</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>yesno</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B> and <B>no</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>yesnocancel</B>
<DD>
Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are <B>yes</B>, <B>no</B>
and <B>cancel</B>.
<P>
<DT>
<B>user</B>
<DD>
Displays buttons of <B>-buttons</B> option.<P>
<DT>
</DL COMPACT>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the length of lines in the window.
If this option has a value greater than zero then the <B>aspect</B>
option is ignored and the <B>width</B> option determines the line
length.
If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
the <B>aspect</B> option determines the line length.

</DD>
</DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>NoteBook</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>NoteBook</B>
 - Notebook manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>NoteBook</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activebackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-activeforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-arcradius">-arcradius</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-homogeneous">-homogeneous</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabbevelsize">-tabbevelsize</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-tabpady">-tabpady</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindtabs"><B>bindtabs</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
 ?<I>page</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

NoteBook widget manage a set of pages and displays one of them.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-arcradius"><B>-arcradius</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the amount of rounding effect at the corners of a tab. This value
can be adjusted from 0 to 8 pixels with the default being 2 pixels. Usually,
small values are preferable.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-homogeneous"><B>-homogeneous</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not the label of the pages must have the same width.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the side where to place the label of the pages. Must be one
of <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabbevelsize"><B>-tabbevelsize</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the amount of bevel the tabs should have. This value can be adjusted from
0 to 8 pixels with the default being 0 pixels. A zero pixel bevel is essentially rectangular
while non-zero bevel size will look trapezoidal.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-tabpady"><B>-tabpady</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies the padding between the text in the tab and the top and bottom
    of the tab.  Padding may be a list of two values to specify padding for
    top and bottom separately.  Padding defaults to {0 6}.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call NoteBook::<B>compute_size</B> to make NoteBook larger
enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindtabs"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindtabs</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on a tab. The page identifier on which
the event occurs is appended to the command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
</DT><DD>

This command can be called to make the NoteBook large enough to contain the largest page.
Note that if all pages use -createcmd, they will have no requested size.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>destroyframe</I>?
</DT><DD>

Deletes the page <I>page</I>. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 1 (the default), the frame
associated to <I>page</I> is destroyed. If <I>destroyframe</I> is 0, the frame is not
destroyed and is reused by further call to <B>insert</B> with the same <I>page</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Return the numerical index corresponding to the item.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Insert a new page idendified by <I>page</I> at position <I>index</I> in the pages list.
<I>index</I> must be numeric or <B>end</B>. The pathname of the new page is returned.

<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-createcmd"><B>-createcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called the first time the page is raised.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an image to display for the page at the left of the label

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-leavecmd"><B>-leavecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when a page is about to be leaved.
The command must return 0 if the page can not be leaved, or 1 if it can.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-raisecmd"><B>-raisecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called each time the page is raised.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-state"><B>-state</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the state of the page. Must be <B>normal</B> or <B>disabled</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Page-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a label to display for the page.

</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Moves <I>page</I> tab to index <I>index</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
 ?<I>page</I>?
</DT><DD>

Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Scrolls labels to make the label of the page <I>page</I> visible.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PagesManager</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PagesManager</B>
 - Pages manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PagesManager</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#compute_size"><B>compute_size</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#page"><B>page</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#pages"><B>pages</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#raise"><B>raise</B></A>
 ?<I>page</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

PagesManager widget manages a set of pages and displays one of them.
PagesManager does not provide any user access method, as NoteBook
does, so it can be done through a listbox, a menu, radiobutton, or
whatever.  The widget shows no pages during creation; there must be an
explicit call to <B>raise</B> to display one.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
larger enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the pages. If this option is equal to zero (the default)
then the window will not request any size at all.
In this case, user may want to call PagesManager::<B>compute_size</B> to make PagesManager
larger enough to contains the largest page.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Add a new page identified by <I>page</I>, which is an arbitrary
identifier.  The pathname of the new page is returned and widgets for
the page should be created with this as the parent or ancestor.
However, PagesManager manages its own geometry. <B>pack</B>,
<B>grid</B> or an equivalent should not be used with the pathname
returned by <B>add</B>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="compute_size"><I>pathName</I> <B>compute_size</B></A>
</DT><DD>

This command can be called to make the PagesManager large enough to contain the largest page.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Deletes the page <I>page</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>page</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the page <I>page</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="page"><I>pathName</I> <B>page</B></A>
 <I>first</I>
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

<B>Its use is deprecated. Use <I>pages</I> instead.</B><BR>
If <I>last</I> is omitted, returns the page at index <I>first</I>, or an empty string if
<I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element. If <I>last</I> is specified, the command
returns a list whose elements are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="pages"><I>pathName</I> <B>pages</B></A>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all pages.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the page at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the pages between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="raise"><I>pathName</I> <B>raise</B></A>
 ?<I>page</I>?
</DT><DD>

Raise the page <I>page</I>, or return the raised page if <I>page</I> is omitted.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PanedWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PanedWindow</B>
 - Tiled layout manager widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanedWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-activator">-activator</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-weights">-weights</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#add"><B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

PanedWindow is a widget that lays out children in
a vertically or horizontally tiled format.
The user can adjust the size of the panes, with a pane control sash created
between children.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-activator"><B>-activator (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

By default, the control sash is either a button or a line depending
upon the underlying operating system.  This sash may be explicitly set
using this option.  If set to <B>line</B> then the sash consists of
just a dividing line.  Otherwise if set to <B>button</B> then it
constists of a knob that can be dragged.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies additional space between the button of the sash and children.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the side of the sash, which implies the layout: <B>top</B> or <B>bottom</B>
(horizontal layout), <B>left</B> or <B>right</B> (vertical layout).
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-weights"><B>-weights (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies how the weights specified when adding panes should be used. Must be
<B>extra</B> or <B>available</B>. When using <I>extra</I>, only extra space is
devided among the diffferent panes relative to their weight. When using
<I>available</I>, all space is devided among the diffferent panes relative to
their weight. Default value for <B>weights</B> is <I>extra</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the width of the button of the sash.  This option is ignored
if the activator is set to <B>line</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command add a new pane. The new pane is placed below the previous pane for
vertical layout or at right for horizontal layout. This command returns a frame
where user can place its widget. Valid options are:
<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-minsize"><B>-minsize</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the minimum size requested for the pane.
See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Pane-weight"><B>-weight</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among panes.
See the <B>grid</B> command for more information.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the pathname of the <I>index</I>th added pane.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PanelFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PanelFrame</B>
 - Frame with a boxed title area
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PanelFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelbackground">-panelbackground</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-panelforeground">-panelforeground</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>

<P>
PanelFrame creates a frame area with a boxed title area.  The boxed title
area contains a label ands allows for other items to be placed in it.  This
can serve like a mini-toolbar.
</P>

<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the widget.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around individual panel area items.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-panelbackground"><B>-panelbackground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The color for the panel area background.
Defaults to the selection highlight background color.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-panelforeground"><B>-panelforeground</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The color for the title text.
Defaults to the selection highlight foreground color.
</DD>
<DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>

<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
 ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Add a widget to the panel. Widgets are <B>pack</B>ed in.
Possible options are:
<DL>
<DT><B>-side</B></DT>
<DD>Side to place item on (defaults to <B>right</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-fill</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to fill space (defaults to <B>none</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-expand</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to expand space (defaults to <B>0</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
</DL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Delete a widget and associated state from the panel.</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
created.</DD>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
<DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="remove"><I>pathName</I> <B>remove</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Remove a widget item and associated state from the panel without destroying
the item.</DD>
</DL>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>PasswdDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>PasswdDlg</B>
 - Login/Password dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>PasswdDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-anchor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-homogeneous</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-modal</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-padx</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-pady</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-spacing</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="LabelEntry.html">OPTIONS from <B>LabelEntry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelanchor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelfont</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelheight</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labeljustify</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-labelwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-logintextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-loginunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdeditable (see <B>-editable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelptext (see <B>-helptext</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdhelpvar (see <B>-helpvar</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdlabel (see <B>-label</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdstate (see <B>-state</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtext (see <B>-text</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdtextvariable (see <B>-textvariable</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-passwdunderline (see <B>-underline</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-wraplength</TD>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

PasswdDlg provides a simple way to display a login/password dialog.
PasswdDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, and return the value of login
and password in a list, or an empty list if it is destroyed or user press cancel.
When returning, the dialog no longer exists.
<BR>Additionnal resources can be set to modify other text:
<PRE>
    *loginName     Label for login LabelEntry
    *passwordName  Label for password LabelEntry
</PRE>

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to call when user press ok button.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a set of buttons to be displayed. The following values are possible:
<DD>
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>ok</B>
<DD>
Displays one button whose symbolic name is <B>ok</B>.<P>
<DT>
<B>okcancel</B>
<DD>
Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are <B>ok</B> and <B>cancel</B>.<P>
</DL COMPACT>

</DD>
</DL>

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<HR>

<ADRESS>Stephane Lavirotte <A HREF="mailto:Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr">(Stephane.Lavirotte@sophia.inria.fr)</A></ADRESS>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressBar</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ProgressBar</B>
 - Progress indicator widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-maximum">-maximum</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-variable">-variable</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ProgressBar widget indicates the user the progress of a lengthly operation.
It is used by <A HREF="MainFrame.html">MainFrame</A>
and <A HREF="ProgressDlg.html">ProgressDlg</A>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the progress indicator.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-maximum"><B>-maximum</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the maximum value of the variable.  This value must be
greater than zero.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the type of the ProgressBar. Must be one of <B>normal</B>,
<B>incremental</B>,  <B>infinite</B> or <B>nonincremental_infinite</B>.

<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>, the progress indicator is drawn
proportional to the variable value and <B>maximum</B> option each time the
variable is set.

<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>incremental</I>, the value of the progress
indicator is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is
set by its value. The progress indicator is drawn proportional to the internal
value and
<B>maximum</B> option.

<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>infinite</I>, the value of the progress indicator
is maintained internally, and incremented each time the variable is set by its
value. The progress indicator moves from left to right if internal value
(modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than <B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left
if internal value is greater than <B>maximum</B>/2.

<BR><BR>If <B>type</B> is <I>nonincremental_infinite</I>, the value of the
progress indicator taken from the variable value, The progress indicator moves
from left to right if variable value (modulo <B>maximum</B>) is less than
<B>maximum</B>/2, and from right to left if internal value is greater than
<B>maximum</B>/2.

<BR><BR>See <B>-variable</B> option for special case of its value,

<BR><BR>Default value for <B>type</B> is <I>normal</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-variable"><B>-variable</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the variable attached to the progress indicator.  Progress indicator
is updated when the value of the variable changes.  If the value of the
variable is negative, the progress indicator is not displayed (it is drawn flat
with <B>background</B> color - usefull for ProgressDlg to make it
invisible). If its value 0, progress indicator is reinitialized.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the progress indicator.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ProgressDlg</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ProgressDlg</B>
 - Progress indicator dialog box
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ProgressDlg</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-textvariable">-textvariable</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Dialog.html">OPTIONS from <B>Dialog</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-parent</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-separator</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-title</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ProgressBar.html">OPTIONS from <B>ProgressBar</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-borderwidth or -bd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-maximum</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-relief</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-troughcolor</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-type</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-variable</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-stop">-stop</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ProgressDlg provides a simple way to display a progress indicator dialog.
ProgressDlg::<B>create</B> creates the dialog, displays it, set a local
grab to it and immediatly return. The dialog is updated by modifying the 
value of the variable of options <B>-textvariable</B> and <B>-variable</B>.
You have to destroy the dialog after use.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to call when user press stop button.  Note that it
is the program's responsibility to periodically call <B>update</B> so
that button press events can be generated.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired height for the label in lines of text.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-stop"><B>-stop</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the text of the button typically used to stop process. If empty, no button will
be drawn. This can be a symbolic name.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a desired width for the label in characters.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollView</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrollView</B>
 - Display the visible area of a scrolled window
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollView</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-fill">-fill</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-window">-window</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ScrollView displays the visible area of a scrolled window within
its scroll region.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the fill color of the rectangle.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-foreground"><B>-foreground</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the color of the border of the rectangle.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the ScrollView.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the ScrollView.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the window to view. This widget must have <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options, and respond to <B>xview</B> and <B>yview</B> command.
In order to make ScrollView working with other scrollbar, <B>-xscrollcommand</B> and 
<B>-yscrollcommand</B> options of the widget must be set before the widget is passed to
the <B>-window</B> option of the ScrollView (for example, if the widget is handled by
a ScrolledWindow, call <B>setwidget</B> before setting <B>-window</B> option).

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>

<DL><DT>If mouse button 1 is pressed and dragged over the ScrollView, the top left corner of
the visible area of the scrolled window is moved proportionally to the mouse displacement.
</DT></DL>
<DL><DT>If mouse button 3 is pressed over the ScrollView, the top left corner of the visible
area is proportionally set to this point.
</DT></DL>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrollableFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrollableFrame</B>
 - Scrollable frame containing widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrollableFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<BR>
Themed widget (<B>Widget::theme true</B>): Options <B>-background</B> and <B>-bg</B> are not available.
Modify style <B>TFrame</B> property <B>-background</B> instead.
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areaheight">-areaheight</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-areawidth">-areawidth</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedheight">-constrainedheight</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-constrainedwidth">-constrainedwidth</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-xscrollincrement">-xscrollincrement</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-yscrollincrement">-yscrollincrement</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
 ?<I>vert</I>?
 ?<I>horz</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ScrollableFrame widget containing widget.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-areaheight"><B>-areaheight</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the height for the scrollable area. If zero, then the height
of the scrollable area is made just large enough to hold all its children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-areawidth"><B>-areawidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the width for the scrollable area. If zero, then the width
of the scrollable area window is made just large enough to hold all its children.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedheight"><B>-constrainedheight</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same height of the
scrolled window. If true, vertical scrollbar is not needed.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-constrainedwidth"><B>-constrainedwidth</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies whether or not the scrollable area should have the same width of the
scrolled window. If true, horizontal scrollbar is not needed.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the window in pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the window in pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-xscrollincrement"><B>-xscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
<DD>

See <B>xscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-yscrollincrement"><B>-yscrollincrement</B></A></DT>
<DD>

See <B>yscrollincrement</B> option of <B>canvas</B> widget.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Return the pathname of the scrolled frame where widget should be created.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
 ?<I>vert</I>?
 ?<I>horz</I>?
</DT><DD>

Arrange scrollable area to make <I>widget</I> visible in the window.
<I>vert</I> and <I>horz</I> specify which part of <I>widget</I> must be preferably
visible, in case where <I>widget</I> is too tall or too large to be entirely visible.
<I>vert</I> must be <B>top</B> (the default) or <B>bottom</B>,
and <I>horz</I> must be <B>left</B> (the default) or <B>right</B>.
If <I>vert</I> or <I>horz</I> is not a valid value, area is not scrolled in this direction.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>ScrolledWindow</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>ScrolledWindow</B>
 - Generic scrolled widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>ScrolledWindow</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DT><I>Not themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
<DT><I>Themed</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;(<B>-bg</B> has no effect)</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-auto">-auto</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-managed">-managed</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-scrollbar">-scrollbar</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sides">-sides</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-size">-size</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setwidget"><B>setwidget</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

ScrolledWindow enables user to create easily a widget with its scrollbar.
Scrollbars are created by ScrolledWindow and scroll commands are automatically associated to
a scrollable widget with <B>ScrolledWindow::setwidget</B>.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-auto"><B>-auto</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired auto managed scrollbar:
<LI><B>none</B> means scrollbar are always drawn
<LI><B>horizontal</B> means horizontal scrollbar is drawn as needed
<LI><B>vertical</B> means vertical scrollbar is drawn as needed
<LI><B>both</B> means horizontal and vertical scrollbars are drawn as needed (default value)
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Padding in pixels between client widget and scrollbars.
Default value: <B>1</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-managed"><B>-managed (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If true, scrollbar are managed during creation, so their size are included in the requested size of the
ScrolledWindow. If false, they are not.
Default value: <B>true</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-scrollbar"><B>-scrollbar</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired scrollbar: <B>none</B>, <B>horizontal</B>, <B>vertical</B>
or <B>both</B> (default value).
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sides"><B>-sides (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Side of the scrollbars.
Possible values are: <B>ne</B>, <B>en</B>, <B>nw</B>, <B>wn</B>, <B>se</B> (default value), <B>es</B>, <B>sw</B>, <B>ws</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-size"><B>-size (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Size of the scrollbars in pixels.
Use </B>0</B> for standard size (default value).<BR>
This option has no effect if widget is <I>themed</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Return the pathname of the frame where the scrolled widget should be created. This command
is no longer needed. You can directly create the scrolled widget as the child
of <I>pathName</I>.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setwidget"><I>pathName</I> <B>setwidget</B></A>
 <I>widget</I>
</DT><DD>

Associate <I>widget</I> to the the scrollbars. <I>widget</I> becomes
managed by the ScrolledWindow.  The user should not attempt to manage
<I>widget</I> until it is no longer managed by the ScrolledWindow.
<I>widget</I> must be a scrollable widget, i.e. have the options
<B>xscrollcommand</B>/<B>yscrollcommand</B> and the command <B>xview</B>/<B>yview</B>,
such as canvas or text.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SelectColor</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SelectColor</B>
 - Color selection widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectColor</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-color">-color</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></td>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-placement">-placement</A></td>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></td>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></td>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#dialog"><B>dialog</B></A>
 <I>pathName</I>
 <I>?option value ...?</I>
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#menu"><B>menu</B></A>
 <I>pathName</I>
 <I>placement</I>
 <I>?option value ...?</I>
</DD>
<DD>SelectColor::<A HREF="#setcolor"><B>setcolor</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>color</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

SelectColor provides a simple way to select color. It can be displayed
as a dialog box or as a menubutton.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-color"><B>-color</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the color value of the widget.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
root window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-placement"><B>-placement</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Where to place the <i>popup</i> color dialog when displaying it.
Must be any of: <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Title of the Dialog toplevel.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type (read-only)</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the type of the SelectColor widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or
<B>popup</B>.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>,
SelectColor::<B>create</B> directly creates the dialog, displays it and
return an empty string if cancel button is pressed or if dialog is destroyed,
and the selected color if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog is
destroyed.  <BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>popup</I>,
SelectColor::<B>create</B> creates a small, popup dialog with a small set of
predefined colors and a button to activate a full color dialog.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>dialog</B></A>
 <I>pathName</I>
 <I>?option value ...?</I>
</DT><DD>

Creates a dialog for the user to select a custom color.

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="dialog">SelectColor::<B>menu</B></A>
 <I>pathName</I>
 <I>placement</I>
 <I>?option value ...?</I>
</DT><DD>

Creates a small, popup dialog for the user to select from a predefined list
of colors with an additional button to display a full color dialog.

<p>
<i>placement</i> can be any of <b>at</b>, <b>center</b>, <b>left</b>,
<b>right</b>, <b>above</b>, or <b>below</b>.  If <i>-parent</i> is specified,
placement will be in relation to the parent widget.
</p>

</DD></DL>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setcolor">SelectColor::<B>setcolor</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>color</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the value of user predefined color at index <I>index</I> to <I>color</I>.
<I>index</I> must be between 0 and 10.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SelectFont</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SelectFont</B>
 - Font selection widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SelectFont</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-command">-command</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-initialcolor">-initialcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-nosizes">-nosizes</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-parent">-parent</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-sampletext">-sampletext</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-title">-title</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-type">-type</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD>SelectFont::<A HREF="#loadfont"><B>loadfont</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

SelectFont provides a simple way to choose font. It can be displayed
as a dialog box or as a toolbar.
<BR>Textual items in Dialog box uses <B>-name</B> options so they
can be translated to any language. Symbolic name used are
<B>ok</B>, <B>cancel</B>, <B>font</B>, <B>size</B>, <B>style</B>,
<B>bold</B>, <B>italic</B>, <B>underline</B> and <B>overstrike</B>.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-command"><B>-command</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to call when user select a new font when SelectFont <B>type</B>
option is <I>toolbar</I>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-initialcolor"><B>-initialcolor</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If specified, add an additional button that lets the user pick a
color.  This option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-nosizes"><B>-nosizes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If true, don't show the listbox containing valid font sizes.  This
option is ignored if <B>type</B> is <I>toolbar</I>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-parent"><B>-parent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Parent of the Dialog. Dialog is centered in its parent. If empty, it is centered in
root window.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-sampletext"><B>-sampletext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the text displayed in the preview area.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-title"><B>-title</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Title of the Dialog toplevel.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-type"><B>-type</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the type of the SelectFont widget. Must be <B>dialog</B> or <B>toolbar</B>.
<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>dialog</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> directly creates the 
dialog, displays it and return an empty string if cancel button is
pressed or if dialog is destroyed, and the selected font (and color
if <B>initialcolor</B>) if ok button is pressed. In all cases, dialog
is destroyed.
<BR>If <B>type</B> option is <I>toolbar</I>, SelectFont::<B>create</B> returns the pathname
of the widget created.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="loadfont">SelectFont::<B>loadfont</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Load the font available in the system.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Separator</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Separator</B>
 - 3D separator widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Separator</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-relief">-relief</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

Separator is a widget that display an horizontal or vertical 3-D line.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-relief"><B>-relief</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the relief of the Separator. Must be <B>groove</B> (the default) or <B>ridge</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>SpinBox</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>SpinBox</B>
 - SpinBox widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>SpinBox</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="ArrowButton.html">OPTIONS from <B>ArrowButton</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-background or -bg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-foreground or -fg</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatdelay</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-repeatinterval</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="Entry.html">OPTIONS from <B>Entry</B></A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLPADDING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-command</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-disabledforeground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragendcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragevent</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-draginitcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dragtype</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropcmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropenabled</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-dropovercmd</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-droptypes</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-editable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entrybg (see <B>-background</B>)</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-entryfg (see <B>-foreground</B>)</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-exportselection</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-font</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptext</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helptype</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-helpvar</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightbackground</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightcolor</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-highlightthickness</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertofftime</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertontime</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-insertwidth</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-justify</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectbackground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectborderwidth</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-selectforeground</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-show</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-state</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-takefocus</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-text</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-textvariable</TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-width</TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;-xscrollcommand</TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-modifycmd">-modifycmd</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-range">-range</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-values">-values</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bind"><B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getvalue"><B>getvalue</B></A>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#setvalue"><B>setvalue</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

SpinBox widget enables the user to select a value among a list given by the <B>values</B>
option or a set of values defined by a mininum, a maximum and an increment.
Notice that <B>range</B> option defines a list of values, so <B>getvalue</B> and
<B>setvalue</B> work with both values and range.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-modifycmd"><B>-modifycmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a Tcl command called when the user modify the value of the SpinBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-range"><B>-range</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of three intergers (or real) describing the minimum, maximum and increment
of the SpinBox.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-values"><B>-values</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the values accepted by the SpinBox. This option takes precedence over
<B>range</B> option.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bind"><I>pathName</I> <B>bind</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Set bindings on the entry widget.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>getvalue</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Returns the index of the current text of the SpinBox in the list of values,
or -1 if it doesn't match any value.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="setvalue"><I>pathName</I> <B>setvalue</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Set the text of the SpinBox to the value indicated by <I>index</I> in the list of values.
<I>index</I> may be specified in any of the following forms:
<P>
<DL COMPACT>
<DT>
<B>last</B>
<DD>
Specifies the last element of the list of values.
<DT><B>first</B>
<DD>
Specifies the first element of the list of values.
<DT>
<B>next</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element following the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT><B>previous</B>
<DD>
Specifies the element preceding the current (ie returned by <B>getvalue</B>) in the list
of values.
<DT>
@<I>number</I>
<DD>
Specifies the integer index in the list of values.
</DL>

</DD></DL>
<HR><BR><B>BINDINGS</B><BR><BR>

When Entry of the SpinBox has the input focus, it has the following bindings, in addition
to the default Entry bindings:
<UL>
<LI>Page up set the value of the SpinBox to the last value.
<LI>Page down set the value of the SpinBox to the first value.
<LI>Arrow up set the value of the SpinBox to the next value.
<LI>Arrow down set the value of the SpinBox to the previous value.
</UL>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>StatusBar</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>StatusBar</B>
 - status bar widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>StatusBar</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-orient">-orient</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-troughcolor">-troughcolor</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showresize">-showresize</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-pad">-pad</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>

<P>
StatusBar widget is a simple container widget with a corner resize control,
meant to be placed at the bottom of a toplevel dialog.
</P>

<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired height for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-showresize"><B>-showresize</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies whether to show the corner resize control.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-pad"><B>-pad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around the status bar.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>
The spacing to place around individual status bar items.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Specifies the desired width for the widget.
</DD>
</DL>

<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="add"><I>pathName</I> <B>add</B></A> <B>widget</B>
 ?<I>option</I> <I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Add a widget to the status bar. Possible options are:
<DL>
<DT><B>-weight</B></DT>
<DD>Weighting of this item for resizing (passed to <B>grid</B>).</DD>
<DT><B>-separator</B></DT>
<DD>Whether to use a separator for this item.</DD>
<DT><B>-sticky</B></DT>
<DD>Passed on to grid.</DD>
<DT><B>-pad</B></DT>
<DD>Override of the widget's <B>-ipad</B> option for this item.</DD>
</DL>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>
Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no
<I>option</I> is specified, returns a list describing all of the available
options for <I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no
<I>value</I>, then the command returns a list describing the one named
<I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or more
<I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the
given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command
returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
<B>widget</B> ?<I>widget</I> ...?
</DT><DD>
Delete a widget and associated state from the status bar.</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>
Get the frame widget for the status bar in which status bar items should be
created.</DD>
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="items"><I>pathName</I> <B>items</B></A>
</DT><DD>List of items in the status bar.</DD>
<DL>

</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>TitleFrame</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>TitleFrame</B>
 - Frame with a title
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>TitleFrame</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-font">-font</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-foreground">-foreground or -fg</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-text">-text</A></TR>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-baseline">-baseline</A></TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-ipad">-ipad</A></TR>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-side">-side</A></TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#getframe"><B>getframe</B></A>
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

TitleFrame enables user to create a frame with a title like XmFrame Motif widget.
</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-baseline"><B>-baseline</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the vertical alignment of the title: <B>top</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>bottom</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-ipad"><B>-ipad</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a pad between the border of the frame and the user frame.
The value is in screen units.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-side"><B>-side</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the horizontal alignment of the title: <B>left</B>, <B>center</B> or <B>right</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is specified,
returns a list describing all of the available options for <I>pathName</I>.
If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the command returns a list
describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will be identical to the corresponding
sublist of the value returned if no <I>option</I> is specified). If one or
more <I>option-value</I> pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget
option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="getframe"><I>pathName</I> <B>getframe</B></A>
</DT><DD>

Return the frame where the user can create any other widget.
</DD></DL>
</BODY></HTML>

<HTML>
<HEAD><TITLE>Tree</TITLE></HEAD>
<BODY BGCOLOR=white>
<DL><DT><I><A HREF="#descr">NAME</A></I></DT>
<DD><B>Tree</B>
 - Tree widget
</DD></DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>CREATION</I></DT>
<DD><A HREF="#descr"><B>Tree</B></A> <I>pathName</I> ?<I>option value...</I>?</DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I>STANDARD OPTIONS</I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-background">-background or -bg</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-borderwidth">-borderwidth or -bd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-cursor">-cursor</A></TD>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightbackground">-highlightbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightcolor">-highlightcolor</A></TD>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-highlightthickness">-highlightthickness</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-relief">-relief</A></TD>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectbackground">-selectbackground</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-selectforeground">-selectforeground</A></TD>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-takefocus">-takefocus</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-xscrollcommand">-xscrollcommand</A></TD>
    <TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="options.htm#M-yscrollcommand">-yscrollcommand</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>
<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></I></DT>
<DD><TABLE CELLSPACING=0 CELLSPACING=0 BORDER=0>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-closecmd">-closecmd</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossfill">-crossfill</A></TD>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossclosebitmap">-crossclosebitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crosscloseimage">-crosscloseimage</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenbitmap">-crossopenbitmap</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-crossopenimage">-crossopenimage</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltax">-deltax</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-deltay">-deltay</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragenabled">-dragenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragendcmd">-dragendcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragevent">-dragevent</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-draginitcmd">-draginitcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dragtype">-dragtype</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropcmd">-dropcmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropenabled">-dropenabled</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovercmd">-dropovercmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-dropovermode">-dropovermode</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-droptypes">-droptypes</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-height">-height</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linesfill">-linesfill</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-linestipple">-linestipple</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-opencmd">-opencmd</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-padx">-padx</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-redraw">-redraw</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectcommand">-selectcommand</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-selectfill">-selectfill</A></TD>
</TR>
<TR>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-showlines">-showlines</A></TD>
<TD>&nbsp;&nbsp;<A HREF="#-width">-width</A></TD>
</TR>
</TABLE></DD>
</DL>

<DL>
<DT><I><A HREF="#wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></I></DT>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindArea"><B>bindArea</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindImage"><B>bindImage</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#bindText"><B>bindText</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#cget"><B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#closetree"><B>closetree</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#configure"><B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#delete"><B>delete</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#edit"><B>edit</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>text</I>
 ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
 ?<I>clickres</I>?
 ?<I>select</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#exists"><B>exists</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#find"><B>find</B></A>
 <I>findinfo</I>
 ?<I>confine</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#index"><B>index</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#insert"><B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>parent</I>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemcget"><B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#itemconfigure"><B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#line"><B>line</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#move"><B>move</B></A>
 <I>parent</I>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#nodes"><B>nodes</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#opentree"><B>opentree</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#parent"><B>parent</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#reorder"><B>reorder</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#see"><B>see</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#selection"><B>selection</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#toggle"><B>toggle</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#visible"><B>visible</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#xview"><B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
<DD><I>pathName</I> <A HREF="#yview"><B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DD>
</DL>
<BR><HR WIDTH="100%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="descr"></A>DESCRIPTION</B><BR>
<P>

<B>Tree</B> widget uses canvas to display a hierarchical list of items (called nodes).
Each node is composed of a label with its own font and foreground attributes, and an optional
image or window. Each node can have a list of subnodes, which can be collapsed or expanded.
Each node is drawn in a single line, whose height is defined by the
<B>deltay</B> option, so they must have at most this height.
A node is uniquely identified by a string given at creation (by the
<B>insert</B> command). The node named <I>root</I> is the root of
the tree and is not drawn.
The tree structure is directly maintained by the widget.

</P>
<BR><HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>
<B><A NAME="wso">WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-closecmd"><B>-closecmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when user close a node. The
closed node is appended to the command.

</DD>
</DL>

<DL>
    <DT><A NAME="-crossfill"><B>-crossfill</B></A></DT>
    <DD>
    Specifies a foreground color for the cross bitmap.
    </DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossclosebitmap"><B>-crossclosebitmap</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
    when a node is closed.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-crosscloseimage"><B>-crosscloseimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
    when a node is closed.  Overrides the -crossclosebitmap option.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenbitmap"><B>-crossopenbitmap</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies a bitmap to be displayed in place of the standard cross
    when a node is open.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-crossopenimage"><B>-crossopenimage</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies an image to be displayed in place of the standard cross
    when a node is open.  Overrides the -crossopenbitmap option.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies horizontal indentation between a node and its children.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltay"><B>-deltay</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies vertical size of the nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragenabled"><B>-dragenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drag is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragendcmd"><B>-dragendcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when drag ended.
<B>dragendcmd</B> must be a command conforming to the description of the
option <B>dragendcmd</B> of <B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragevent"><B>-dragevent</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the number of the mouse button associated to the drag.
Must be <B>1</B>, <B>2</B> or <B>3</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-draginitcmd"><B>-draginitcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-init</I> events. This command refused the drag
if no node is designated. In other cases:
<BR>If <B>draginitcmd</B> is empty, it returns:
<UL>
<LI>the value of option <B>dragtype</B> or <I>TREE_NODE</I> if empty as the data type, 
<LI><I>{copy move link}</I> as the operations, 
<LI>the node identifier as the data.
</UL>
If <B>draginitcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the identifier of the dragged node,
<LI>the toplevel created to represent dragged data.
</UL>
and must return a value conforming to <B>draginitcmd</B> option described in
<B>DragSite::<A HREF="DragSite.html#register">register</A></B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dragtype"><B>-dragtype</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an alternate type of dragged object.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropcmd"><B>-dropcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drop</I> events. This command stops auto scrolling
and extract node and position.
<BR>If <B>dropcmd</B> is not empty, it is called with the following arguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop occurs. It can be:
<UL>
<LI><I>{</I><B>widget</B><I>}</I>,
<LI><I>{</I><B>node</B> <I>node}</I> or
<LI><I>{</I><B>position</B> <I>node index}</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>


</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropenabled"><B>-dropenabled</B></A></DT>
<DD>
A boolean specifying if drop is enabled.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovercmd"><B>-dropovercmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Tree has a command wrapper for <I>drag-over</I> events. This command enables auto scrolling
and position extraction during the <I>drag-over</I>.
If <B>dropovercmd</B> is not empty, the command is called with the following aguments:
<UL>
<LI>the pathname of the tree,
<LI>the pathname of the drag source,
<LI>a list describing where the drop can occur, whose elements are:
<UL>
<LI>the string <I>widget</I> if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>w</I>, else empty string.
<LI>the targeted node if drag icon points a node and <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>n</I>, else empty string.
<LI>a list containing a node and the position within the children of the node where drag 
icon points to if <B>dropovertype</B> option contains <I>p</I>, else empty string.
<LI>optionally, the preferred method if drop can occur both inside a node and between two
nodes. The value is <I>position</I> or <I>node</I>.
</UL>
<LI>the current operation,
<LI>the data type,
<LI>the data.
</UL>
The command must return a list with two elements:
<UL>
<LI>the drop status, conforming to those described in <B>dropovercmd</B> option of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>,
<LI>the choosen method: <I>widget</I>, <I>node</I> or <I>position</I>.
</UL>

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-dropovermode"><B>-dropovermode</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the type of <I>drop-over</I> interaction. Must be a combination of
<B>w</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs everywhere on widget,
<B>p</B>, which specifies that drop can occurs between two nodes,
and <B>n</B>, which specifies that drop occurs inside nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-droptypes"><B>-droptypes</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a list of accepted dropped object/operation.
See option <B>droptypes</B> of
<B>DropSite::<A HREF="DropSite.html#register">register</A></B>.
for more infromation.

<BR>Default is <I>TREE_NODE</I> with operations <B>copy</B> and <B>move</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-height"><B>-height</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired height for the tree in units of <B>deltay</B> pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-linesfill"><B>-linesfill</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a foreground color for the lines between nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-linestipple"><B>-linestipple</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a stipple bitmap for the lines between nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-opencmd"><B>-opencmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when the user opens a node. The name
of the opened node is appended to the command.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies distance between image or window and text of the nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-redraw"><B>-redraw</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not the tree should be redrawn when entering idle.
Set it to false if you call <B>update</B> while modifying the tree.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectcommand"><B>-selectcommand</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a command to be called when the selection is changed. The
path of the tree widget and the selected nodes are appended to the
command.

</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-selectfill"><B>-selectfill</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    If true, the selection box will be drawn across the entire tree from
    left-to-right instead of just around the item text.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="-showlines"><B>-showlines</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies whether or not lines should be drawn between nodes.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-width"><B>-width</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the desired width for the tree in units of 8 pixels.

</DD>
</DL>
<HR WIDTH="50%"><BR>

<B><A NAME="nodes">NODE NAMES</A></B><BR>
<p>
Certain special characters in node names are automatically substituted
by the tree during operation.  These characters are <b>&amp; | ^ !</b>.
They are all substituted with a <b>_</b> character.  This is only to
avoid errors because the characters are special to the tree widget.
</p>

<B><A NAME="wc">WIDGET COMMAND</A></B><BR>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindArea"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindArea</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs anywhere within the Tree area.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindImage"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindImage</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the image of a node.
The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).

<P>
If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindText</B> is overwritten.
</P>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="bindText"><I>pathName</I> <B>bindText</B></A>
 <I>event</I>
 <I>script</I>
</DT><DD>

This command associates a command to execute whenever the event
sequence given by <I>event</I> occurs on the label of a node.
The node idenfier on which the event occurs is appended to the command and may be used to manipulate the tree (e.g. don't use <B>%W</B>).

<P>
If <B>-selectfill</B> is given, an eventual binding of the background box by <B>bindImage</B> is overwritten.
</P>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="cget"><I>pathName</I> <B>cget</B></A>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of the configuration option given by <I>option</I>.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="closetree"><I>pathName</I> <B>closetree</B></A> <I>node</I>
?<I>recurse</I>?
</DT><DD>

This command close all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse
through the tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 0
depending on <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="configure"><I>pathName</I> <B>configure</B></A>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no <I>option</I> is
specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for
<I>pathName</I>.  If <I>option</I> is specified with no <I>value</I>, then the
command returns a list describing the one named <I>option</I> (this list will
be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
<I>option</I> is specified). If one or more <I>option-value</I> pairs are
specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the
given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the creation command.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="delete"><I>pathName</I> <B>delete</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Deletes all nodes (and children of them) in <I>arg</I>. <I>arg</I> can be a list
of nodes or a list of list of nodes.
To delete all the tree, do <I>$pathName delete [$pathName nodes root]</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="edit"><I>pathName</I> <B>edit</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>text</I>
 ?<I>verifycmd</I>?
 ?<I>clickres</I>?
 ?<I>select</I>?
</DT><DD>

Provides a way for the user to edit in place the label of a node. This is
possible only if <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).
<BR>The command takes the initial text as argument and does not modify the label of the
edited node, but returns an empty string if edition is canceled, or the typed text
if edition is accepted.
<BR>When editing, the user can cancel by pressing Escape, or accept by pressing Return.
<BR><I>clickres</I> specifies what to do if the user click outside the editable area.
If <I>clickres</I> is 0 (the default), the edition is canceled.
If <I>clickres</I> is 1, the edition is accepted.
In all other case, the edition continues.
<BR>If edition is accepted and <I>modifycmd</I> is not empty, then it is called with
the new text as argument and must return 1 to accept the new text, 0 to refuse it
and continue edition.
<BR><I>select</I> specifies wether or not the initial text should be selected. Default is 1.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="exists"><I>pathName</I> <B>exists</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns whether or not <I>node</I> exists in the tree.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="find"><I>pathName</I> <B>find</B></A>
 <I>findinfo</I>
 ?<I>confine</I>?
</DT><DD>

<p>
Returns the node given by the position <I>findinfo</I>.
<I>findinfo</I> can take the form of a pixel position <I>@x,y</I> or
of the line number of a currently visible Tree node.  The first line
of the Tree has the value of zero.
</p>

<p>
If <I>confine</I> is non-empty, then confine <I>findinfo</I> to only
match pixel positions for the area consumed by Tree labels, not just
anywhere on their lines.  (<I>confine</I> has no effect if
<I>findinfo</I> is a line number.)
</p>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="index"><I>pathName</I> <B>index</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the position of <I>node</I> in its parent.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="insert"><I>pathName</I> <B>insert</B></A>
 <I>index</I>
 <I>parent</I>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>option value...</I>?
</DT><DD>

<p>
Inserts a new node identified by <I>node</I> in the children list of
<I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
</p>

<p>
Any instance of <i>#auto</i> within the node name will be replaced by the
number of the item in the order of insertion.  The non-printable characters
\1 to \5 are reserved for internal use and should not be present in node
names.
</p>


<P>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-anchor"><B>-anchor</B></A></DT>
<DD>
    Specifies the anchor of the image or window of the node.  Defaults to w.
</DD>
</DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-data"><B>-data</B></A></DT>
<DD>

User data associated to the node.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-deltax"><B>-deltax</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the horizontal indentation of the node.  If the value is -1, the
node will be drawn with the deltax for the entire tree.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-drawcross"><B>-drawcross</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies how the cross used to expand or collapse the children of a node
should be drawn. 
Must be one of <B>auto</B>, <B>always</B> or <B>never</B>.
<BR>If <B>auto</B>, the cross is drawn only if the node has children.
If <B>always</B>, the cross is always drawn.
If <B>never</B>, the cross is never drawn.
To maintain compatibility with older versions of this widget,
<B>allways</B> is a deprecated synonym to <B>always</B>.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-fill"><B>-fill</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the foreground color of the label of the node.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-font"><B>-font</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a font for the label of the node.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpcmd"><B>-helpcmd</B></A></DT>
<DD>

If specified, refers to a command to execute to get the help text to display.
The command must return a string to display.
If the command returns an empty string, no help is displayed. 
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptext"><B>-helptext</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Text for dynamic help.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helptype"><B>-helptype</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Type of dynamic help. Use <I>balloon</I> or <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-helpvar"><B>-helpvar</B></A></DT>
<DD>
Variable to use when <B>helptype</B> option is <I>variable</I>.
See also <A HREF="DynamicHelp.html">DynamicHelp</A>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-image"><B>-image</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies an image to display at the left of the label of the node.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-open"><B>-open</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies wether or not the children of the node should be drawn.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="-padx"><B>-padx</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the distance between image or window and the text of the node.  If
the value is -1, the node will be drawn with the padx for the entire tree.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-selectable"><B>-selectable</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies if the node can be selected or not.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-text"><B>-text</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies the label of the node.

</DD>
</DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="Node-window"><B>-window</B></A></DT>
<DD>

Specifies a pathname to display at the left of the label of the node.
<B>window</B> option override <B>image</B>.
</DD>
</DL>
</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemcget"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemcget</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>option</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the current value of a configuration option for the item.
<I>Option</I> may have any of the values accepted by the item creation command.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="itemconfigure"><I>pathName</I> <B>itemconfigure</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>option</I>? ?<I>value</I> <I>option</I> <I>value</I> ...?
</DT><DD>

This command is similar to the <B>configure</B> command, except that it applies to the
options for an individual item, whereas <B>configure</B> applies to the options for
the widget as a whole. <B>Options</B> may have any of the values accepted by the 
item creation widget command. If options are specified, options are modified as indicated
in the command and the command returns an empty string. If no options are specified,
returns a list describing the current options for the item.
Read-only options are not be modified.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="line"><I>pathName</I> <B>line</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

<p>
Returns the line number where <I>node</I> was drawn.  If the node is
not visible then return -1.  The first line of the tree has the value
of 0.
</p>

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="move"><I>pathName</I> <B>move</B></A>
 <I>parent</I>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>index</I>
</DT><DD>

Moves <I>node</I> to the children list of <I>parent</I> at position <I>index</I>.
<I>parent</I> can not be a descendant of <I>node</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="nodes"><I>pathName</I> <B>nodes</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 ?<I>first</I>?
 ?<I>last</I>?
</DT><DD>

Returns parts of the children of <I>node</I>, following <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>.<BR>
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are omitted, returns the list of all children.
If <I>first</I> is specified and <I>last</I> omitted, returns the child at index
<I>first</I>, or an empty string if <I>first</I> refers to a non-existent element.
If <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> are specified, the command returns a list whose elements
are all of the children between <I>first</I> and <I>last</I>,
inclusive. Both <I>first</I> and <I>last</I> may have any of the standard
forms for indices.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="opentree"><I>pathName</I> <B>opentree</B></A> <I>node</I> ?<I>recurse</I>?

</DT><DD>

This command open all the subtree given by <I>node</I>. Recurse through the
tree starting at <I>node</I> and set <B>open</B> option to 1 depending on value
of <I>recurse</I>. Default value of <I>recurse</I> is <I>true</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="parent"><I>pathName</I> <B>parent</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns the parent of <I>node</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="reorder"><I>pathName</I> <B>reorder</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
 <I>neworder</I>
</DT><DD>

Modifies the order of children of <I>node</I> given by <I>neworder</I>. Children of
<I>node</I> that do not appear in <I>neworder</I> are no moved.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="see"><I>pathName</I> <B>see</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

Arrange the scrolling area to make <I>node</I> visible.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="selection"><I>pathName</I> <B>selection</B></A>
 <I>cmd</I>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Modifies the list of selected nodes following <I>cmd</I>:
<DL>
<DT><B>add</B>
<DD>Adds all nodes in <I>arg</I> to the selection.
<DT><B>clear</B>
<DD>Removes all nodes from the selection.
<DT><B>get</B>
<DD>Returns a list containing the indices of current selected nodes.
<DT><B>includes</B>
<DD>Tests if the specified node is selected. Returns true if the answer is yes, and false else.
<DT><B>range</B>
<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes between the two specified ones.
<DT><B>remove</B>
<DD>Removes all nodes in <I>arg</I> from the selection.
<DT><B>set</B>
<DD>Sets the selection to all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
<DT><B>toggle</B>
<DD>Toggles the selection status of all nodes in <I>arg</I>.
</DL>

The subcommands <B>add</B>, <B>range</B>, and <B>set</B> silently
ignore nodes which are declared unselectable. See the node option
<a href="#Node-selectable">-selectable</a> to influence this.

</DD></DL>

</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="toggle"><I>pathName</I> <B>toggle</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>
    Toggle the open/close status of the given <i>node</i>.
</DD></DL>

<DL><DT><A NAME="visible"><I>pathName</I> <B>visible</B></A>
 <I>node</I>
</DT><DD>

Returns whether or not <I>node</I> is visible (all its parents are open).

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="xview"><I>pathName</I> <B>xview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable horizontal scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>
<DL><DT><A NAME="yview"><I>pathName</I> <B>yview</B></A>
 ?<I>arg...</I>?
</DT><DD>

Standard command to enable vertical scrolling of <I>pathName</I>.

</DD></DL>

<B><A NAME="nodes">BINDINGS</A></B><BR>

<p>
A <b>&lt;&lt;TreeSelect&gt;&gt;</b> virtual event is generated any time the
selection in the tree changes.  This is the default behavior of an
item in the tree, but it can be overridden with the bindText or
bindImage command.  If the button 1 binding is overridden, this event may
not be generated.
</p>

<p>
The tree has all the standard mouse wheel bindings when it has focus.
</p>

</BODY></HTML>